Home

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual

1. Hr INPutIQ BALanced STATe encre rere t eher Eege deed each ae Nee UE MD db 161 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel Ji ide ap d e X INPUT SELEG C R PM IN STrumentChRtate Dit lcote 138 INSTrumerit GREate REBLACO ii citi eet e e eo d Ra ra ecu Lr e Pepe TR ERE Ed aded 138 INSTrumerit GREate NEW eri i Aine iet de seat de ree tC ERE ER DH UE 138 INSTrument DELete INSTrument Ha S 139 INSTrument REName RM 140 INS New CIE 141 LAYOUtADDEWINDOW pisicii 201 LAYo ut CATalogEWINDow i taco re a adana aaran Dc a cei eerte e rode pd P x eet do e ene es 203 LAYout IDENtify WINDow EAYout REMOveEWINDOW rete eec certo cta bo Fe Ebrei E eM ee eee te ae ies LAYout REPLace WINDow BN deele LAvoutWlNDow cnz ADD 206 I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 290 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands LAYout WINDowWsri IDENtEJ 2 nt Cerdo rere geed 206 IEN de le 206 BA geen lee ET EE 207 MMEMOry EOAD IQ STA TC veers dir ye teer eda aite D ied aia nian nen ieee dean dee PE 255 MMEMory STORe I OQ COMMBnI roi error rre reel rere ea YER Een Ee EENEN ENE E AENEA AE NENE 255 MMEMOrty STORSG IQ STATO icai eret tor irrupit veces e des ed E See PESE Re RENE VE LEE Ca ORENEA
2. 82 L Preamplifier option E incisis cti pntat ten epu a buit EEN 82 Power Class The following power classes are supported 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 145 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 80 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REENEN Input and Frontend Settings Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 170 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingl
3. 90 Demodulationy T AQ 94 e Measurement Settings EE 100 e Adjusting Settings Automatically sese 107 6 1 Default Settings for GSM measurements When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 59 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REESEN Default Settings for GSM measurements e attenuation e preamplification e Signal source e input coupling After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to the GSM application or after a Preset Channel Table 6 1 Default settings for GSM channels Parameter Value Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Device type BTS Normal Mutli Carrier BTS Off Power class 1 Frequency band E GSM 900 Modulation NB GMSK YIG Preselector Off Capture time 100 0 ms Swap UO Off Statistic count 200 Slot to Measure 0 No slots to measure 1 First slot to measure 0 Synchronizat
4. J4 Ya r Q s Y The Trigger to Sync diagram shows two traces e Trace a histogram shows the probability density function PDF of all measured Trigger to Sync values Obviously the histogram can only provide reasonable results if several IO captures are performed and considered In an ideal case assuming no noise the histogram would be a rectangle over the sampling time The histogram is helpful to determine the number of samples to be averaged in order to obtain the required time resolution The more samples are averaged the more the graph becomes rectangular and the higher the resolution becomes However the error of the DUT increases as well e Trace2 the second trace is superimposed on the histogram and visualizes the prob ability density function PDF of the average Trigger to Sync value and the standard deviation as provided in the Trigger to Sync table This trace helps you judge the reliability of the averaged values in the table The lower this trace the less the indi vidual values deviate from the averaged result if this trace is too high increase the Statistic Count Note The x axis of the histogram indicates the individual Trigger to Sync values Thus the scaling must be very small in the range of ns However since the value range in particular the start value of the possible results is not known the x axis must be adapted to the actual values after
5. 172 PPPS ES A m E 172 INPUCEATT AUTO EE 172 INPUREAT ENKE 172 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Mechanical Attenuation on page 81 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 EEUU RA T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 171 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mA U A J JJP HP w Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation
6. a Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 73 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 73 11 4 2 3 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 157 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 167 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPURIO BALanGed STATE iii m 161 INPUt IQ FULLES GEN 1 eni uucedered erae teca tuto cd e teeth io entree 162 INPURIG PULL Scale LEVE C Pm 162 de iH Rudd ER 162 IER ISP uit ro enin rimam cr inte Era nda td Pau ba Pont oda dd 163 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State
7. EEEa 15 a P 16 Magnitude 3 6 or 0 y MD E 16 Lusto PAULSEN ON d cc 17 Marker io P P 18 EE ei 18 Modulation Speotmy Gram EE 20 Modulation Spectrum NK e EE 22 Phas o EN O CH 23 Power rcl EE 24 PVT xui oiccen aaa aa a a aaa a aaa 25 Transient Spectrum Graphie 27 Transient spectrum KI EE 28 Tagger to Syne E DEE 29 Taggar COSY OG TAE a EE E exte ceeds daba n eRRX Y uS 30 Constellation The complex source signal is displayed as an X Y diagram The application analyzes the specified slot over the specified number of bursts User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 15 R amp SS9FSW K10 Measurement Results 2 Constellation ei Cir Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 EVM Displays the error vector magnitude over time for the Slot to Measure 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min e4 Clrwf 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH ETIMe see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 Magnitude Capture Displays the power vs time trace of the captured UO data Pre trigger samples are not displayed The analyzed slot scope 1 to 8 slots of a single GSM frame are indicated by a green bar the single Slot to Measure by a blue bar at the bottom of the diagram For details see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 EEUU R
8. 54 55 Modulation Spectrum 54 Multiple carriers 130 Power vs Time 55 Restricting spectrum 103 Transient Spectrum wee 54 Troubleshooting 130 Limit lines SS DOCU UNM seer EET 103 Time alignment e Limits ieri es dus E 70 Limit Time Alignment User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 297 R amp S9FSW K10 Index Linearized GMSK pulse sssssssssee 48 gig TNE 67 Loading it tero e 118 M Magnitude Capture Evaluation method Results remote leie WE Magnitude Error Evaluation method eee 17 Ixesults remote nennen 224 Markers Absolute peak eene 114 Assigned trace opere rtr rere nera 112 Configuration remote sese 211 Configuring EE Configuring softkey sse 110 BI E Delta markers MITTAT coo corriere tore Aere enge Peak EE Positioning Positioning remote ennt 211 Querying position remote ssssss 254 Settings remote sa State Irem M Table evaluation method I mw Marker table Gonfigutlhg sesana saved der ea ie E aeai 112 Evyaltation metliod rrr ertet 18 Marker to Trace SONKEY dcn 112 Maximizing
9. sees enne nren neret 212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK essent enn nenne ennt 212 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MINimumg PEAK sessi 212 CALCulate cnz DEL Tamarker mz TRACe eee neen ene nnn nennt rne sen nrne sehn thn tete t sts e stent nennt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker zmz SREL ative neri rnstnnantnnnnnnnnne nnne 253 CALCu late lt sn gt DEI Tamarkercmz WV 253 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m STATe essen ener nnne nreen rennen nnne rne nnne 209 e Reli 252 CALC latesn gt MARKersm gt AOF F nennen enhn nsns hints sn nrnis ENEE EE Aa A AAEE IEEE EERE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAximumf PDEART nennen enne nnne nnne renn nennen nnn CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimmumfPEART eene nnne enne nnne nnne CAlulate cnzMAbker cmz TRACe enne nrenneren nent eretnret rnit ense neret rns eten sene eer s innen CALCulatesn gt MARKGRsM gt X oera P e 254 CALCu latesn gt MARKer lt mM gt Y EE 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe 210 CONFigure BURStETIMe IMMediate eese ettet rnnt nnn tnter neat a nan 263 CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate essent 263 CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate sese 263 CONFigure BURSEPFERror IMM
10. esses ale we ME Importing Exporting Importing remote sssssssseneee UO Power Trigger Softkey iiit ette 87 Trigger level remote ssssesssssss 176 IB E 279 IF Power Trigger SoftKey EE 88 Trigger level remote ssesssesss 175 Impedance bocucP M 157 STE e MA 71 Importing FUNCIONS iscsi M 118 YQ data tee erret 59 118 119 281 UO data remote 255 iic m 119 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 75 iere ET 70 Configuration remote sssssssssss 155 Coupling tae Coupling remote sees 156 Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 72 Overload remote SONGS s or ire eh ees Source Analog Baseband neee Source connection errors T Source digital I Q erint eren Source Radio frequency RF ssssuss 71 Source Configuration softkey sss 70 Input Frontend Eoi dieast 70 Input sample rate ISR Digital e EE 73 lristallation et teer teres 10 K Keys LINES not used terrere 59 Old 113 MKR FUNCT not used eeee 59 Peak Search z RUN CONT R N SINGLEE einer rer E 94 L Limit check Active carniers m caceserneanesneetertesnenncende 130 Calculating
11. eese nennen 230 READ BURSIEMAGCGUracy ALL iere torte e a a cerne eue ette eet tud Do ett 229 READ BURG MAC CurzcvlBbOWer AVERage nennen nennen nnne eren 231 READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent 231 READ BURSIt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum sees nnnm 231 READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation cceccecceceeceeeceeceeeeeesessesaecaeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeseesesieeeeaeeas 231 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFtERbRor AVERage titt nt intir ttkntiatanranatntnentnnent enea 267 READBURGU MAC CuracvlFtRbRorCURbent ener 267 READ BURSI MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum isessssssesessee ener trennen ennt 267 READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation 267 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuency ANVERage enne nennen 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent essere nennen nns 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum essen 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation eese 232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOilMbalance AVERage nennen nennen nnne 233 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent 1 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvlIOilMbalance MANImum enne rennen nnne 233 READ BURG MAC CursacvllOlMbalance GDEVlaton nemen 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFiset AVERage 233 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent sess nren eren nns 233 EGERIT RU UU SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 291 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands READ BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset M
12. Decision Instant 7 Symbol Period e Amplitude normalized e ue in 2 1 D 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 14 EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom Timeslot Alignment Reference Time The definition of a reference time is necessary for the following description of timeslot alignment In the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 in Section 5 7 it is stated that Irrespective of the symbol duration used the center of the training sequence shall occur at the same point in time ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 50 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements DESSERT Timeslot Alignment This is illustrated in Figure 5 7 3 of the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 which is reproduced below for convenience figure 5 15 Due to this requirement the middle of TSC or center of Active Part shall be used as the reference time when specifying time slot alignment Additionally the middle of TSC is used for the alignment of the Power vs Time limit masks see also Limit Line Time Alignment on page 102 lt 3750 13 us lt 3750 13 ps Normal Symbol Period Burst Reduced Symbol Period Burst Fig 5 15 Timing alignment between normal symbol period and reduced symbol period bursts As described in chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 47 the middle of TSC can be defined with respect to symbol periods
13. Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit See chapter 5 14 Limit Check for Power vs Time Results on page 55 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PTF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 252 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 26 R amp SS9FSW K10 Measurement Results Transient Spectrum Graph The transient spectrum is very similar to the modulation spectrum evaluation it evaluates the power vs frequency trace by measuring the power over several frames However as opposed to the modulation spectrum evaluation the entire slot scope defined by the Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to measure is evaluated in each frame including the rising and falling burst edges not just the useful part in the Slot to Mea sure Furthermore the number of fixed frequency offsets is lower and the peak power is eval uated rather than the average power as this measurement is used to determine irregu larities The Transient Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies for the specified slots The measured values can be checked against defined limits
14. ttt DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition ttt DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue ettet ttt DiSblautWINDowenslTRACestsMODE nisat trasate nasaat nnas an annaa at nnna an ennaa DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ettet DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALUe MAXIMUM sssessssseessssseesssssessssseessssseessesseesssseeesen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t STATe ettet ttt ttt ttt ttti DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA sccssssssessssssesssssvesssssvesssssvessssivssssseessssseessssiesssasiessssseessssteessssieesssseetsen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MUL Tiple zoom AREA ettet DiSblaufWINDowensZOOM MULTgleszooms ST ATe rnan DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe ett ttt ttt ttt ttt FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage FETCH BURSrbTEMpiate TRGS CUpbent rasant r rasane ennaa 250 FETCH BURSrbTEMpiate TRGS MANimum ttt ttti 250 FETCH BURSrbTEMpiate TRGS MiNimum nasaat i nnsanenrr aa 250 FETCH BURSrbTEMpiate TRGS SDEVlaton ttt 250 FETCH BURSt SbOWer SL OToss ALL AVERage 240 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL CRESt 241 FETCH BURSt SbOWer SL Oe ALL M ximum 242 FETCH BURSt SbOWer SL Ofess CUBRentAutRage ttt 243 FETCH BURSt SbOWer SL Ofess CUBRentCHESn an 244 FETCH BURSt SbOWer SL OTess CUPRentM Aximum 245 FETCH BURSt SbOWer S
15. This command works in conjunction with thecCONFigure MS NETWork TYPE command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 143 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt Example Manual operation 380 410 450 480 710 750 810 850 900 1800 1900 380 380 MHz band valid for TGSM 410 410 MHz band valid for TGSM 450 450 MHz band valid for GSM 480 480 MHz band valid for GSM 710 710 MHz band valid for GSM 750 750 MHz band valid for GSM 810 810 MHz band valid for TOSM 850 850 MHz band valid for GSM 900 900 MHz band valid for PGSM EGSM RGSM and TGSM 1800 1800 MHz band valid for DCS 1900 1900 MHz band valid for PCS RST 900 CONF NETW FREO 380 See Frequency Band on page 64 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE Value This command works in conjunction with the CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 143 command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote co
16. 11 10 2 Programming Examples FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 Query the absolute mod spectrum table results FETCH SPECtrum MODulation ALL gt 00 933200000 933200000 86 36 70 23 ABS PASSED Query the reference power of the mod spectrum FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence 11 13 11 13 30000 p a a a Exporting Captured I Q Data Query the sample rate for the captured I Q data Note The returned value depends on Capture time SENSe SWEep TIME Mod frequency list CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Therefore only query the sample rate afterwards TRAC IQ SRAT 6500000 The number of samples can be calculated as follows floor CaptureTime 577 us SampleRate floor 1s 577 us 6 5 MHz 100r 6503750 5 6503750 samples Query the captured I Q data TRACel IQ DATA MEMory 0 6503750 Alternatively store the captured I Q data to a file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM measurement of an AQPSK modu lated signal in a remote environment a Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Jp enese esn Frequency and Le
17. Power vs Time Filter Multi Carrier BTS on Multi Carrier Filter Power vs Time Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to measure PerSlt Multicarrier BTS This parameter informs the R amp S FSW GSM application that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal This function is only available if the Device Type is a BTS type see Device Type on page 63 Activating this checkbox has the following effects e Anadditional multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path of the R amp S FSW GSM application This filter can for example suppress up to six adjacent channels with a channel spacing of 600 kHz from the measured channel at the set center frequency and 30 dB higher power compared to the measured channel This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal in order to get meaningful EVM values Otherwise there would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the reference signal e Additional multicarrier parameters become available Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs on page 154 Single Carrier PvT Filter The PvT Filter controls the filter used to reduced the measurement bandwidth for single carrier Power vs Time measurements The parameter is only available if Multicarrier BTS is switched off see Multicarrier BTS on page 69 The following single carrier PvT filters are supported 1 MHz Gauss
18. Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 179 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the TRIG key and then select the Trigger Config softkey e Inthe Overview select the Trigger button Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Free Run Drop Out Time Offset i Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode however an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements For more information see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 39 External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 85 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Trigger Settings Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigg
19. Slot 1 Burst Type Normal Burst NB Slot 2 Modulation Slot3 Filter Slot 4 TT mete elem e em TSC O Set 1 Slot 5 User TSC 00000000000000000000 Slot 6 000000 Slot 7 Fig 6 1 Slot configuration for normal and higher symbol rate bursts Frame Slot Multi Carrier Slot 0 Off Slot 1 Burst Type Slot 2 Modulation Slot 3 Filter Slot 4 Timing Advance Slot 5 Sync Slot 6 User Sync 00000000000000000000 Slot 7 00000000000000000000 Fig 6 2 Slot configuration for access burst User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 ep R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Signal Description parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Param o The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these eters on page 46 Slot State On Off Activates or deactivates the selected slot The R amp S FSW GSM application expects an input signal within the active slots only At least the Slot to Measure must be active in order to evaluate it Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number STATe on page 148 Burst Type Assigns a burst type to the selected slot The following burst types are supported e Normal NB e Higher Symbol Rate HB e Access AB The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected burst type Note The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of thes
20. esses nemen nennen emere nere 233 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvllOOttserCURbent nennen nennen nennen 233 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum essen enne rennen nnne 233 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvllOOtset SGDEVlaton nemen 233 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMER orPDEAkK AVEhRagoe nene eene nnns 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essen nennen 234 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMER orPDEAkK MANimum eene 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation eese 234 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage 1234 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMER or RMG CUbbent 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum esee nennen 234 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation eese 234 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpress AVERage nere nennen tenente 235 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlOSllbpressCURbent 235 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum 1235 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation essere 235 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERGentle EVM nennen nnne 235 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROTr sess emere 236 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr essere rennen 236 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage isses nennen eren 236 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent 1 236 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum esses 236 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERRor PDEAK GDEVlaton
21. OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 72 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Preselec tor on page 72 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 156 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 2 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 72 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 71 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which connec tor is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequenc
22. Output GOMMQUIFATION L 70 Configuration remote 155 166 Configuration softkey sse 83 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 298 R amp S9FSW K10 Index Kei 83 Tue EE 83 le 0 ee eee 84 89 Overload RE input remote rettet et 156 Overview CONMGUPAtION iss crt te ere i ER rer 61 P Parameters Modulation Accuracy ssssss 19 23 24 29 PCL T 279 PDF 279 Peaks Absolute eebe 114 Marker positioning esee 114 len M M 114 Peak search CMT 114 Performance tele VE 129 Performing GSM measurement l ierrererrrsrtererrrrrene 122 Phase Error Evaluation method nene 23 I esults remote rrr rrr 224 Power UE ITU Reference PvT Reference Transient Spectrum 104 vs slot evaluation method isseeeeeeieeerrrreerrrenees 24 vs slot results remote vs time see PVT ssssssssseseeeeeeeenn enhn Power vs Time HEME COCK dq E 55 Preamplifier iu EE 82 SONKEY M 82 Presetting GIC Default values Mc T a et LE Probes le tellt WEE 77 e EE 76 Programming examples SUAUSUCS M eege geed ge 269 273 276 Protection RF inp t remote tr eter eerie rs 156 SAY Nene ene 279 Configuratio N E 100 Filter s F
23. Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 206 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAYout WINDow n REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow command To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYo
24. T 7 1 1 About this Manual 5 crucero nene rtrnn oce brnn cuna na anra aaa Fan cu a YR E ENREEEEEEE 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nnne nnn hann innnnnnr nar in nnn n irren nnns 7 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation esee nnn 9 2 Welcome to the GSM Application eeesesses 10 2 4 Starting the GSM Application eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeee nnne nnne nnn nnne nnne nnn 10 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeeeenennnn NN 11 3 About the Measurement ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee en 14 4 Measurement Resulfs iecit er exes cate xassnczcnennnninnnmnnnnnnnceemanes 15 5 Basics on GSM Measurements eese 32 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards eeseseeeeseeseeenene nennen nnn nnn nnns 32 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution 32 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS esee nnne nnne nennen nnn nnn nennen 36 5 4 AQPSK DE d DEE 38 55 riggersettings eR DIE Lee dE 39 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement eene enne 40 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application eese 42 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters eeeseesseeeeeneneeenenennn nenn
25. The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 259 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Status Reporting System Usage Query only 11 8 3 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the GSM application For more information on the contents of the status registers see e chapter 11 8 1 The STATus QUEStionable S YNC Register on page 256 chapter 11 8 2 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 257 e General Status Register Commande eee 260 e Reading Qut the EVEN Eet ini Ales ASSA 260 e Reading Out tlie CONDition Pat iae eerie etie 261 e Controlling the EINABle Paltt ree etre
26. This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Ana log Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 161 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements c GNO J M ue sr Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 76 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the fullscale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 162 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the fullscale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 162 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This
27. To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores all measurements in all mea surement channels on the R amp S FSW to their default values For details see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for GSM measurements on page 59 Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 141 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window IECH User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 62 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Ech Signal Description 6 3 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimizes frame detection and measurement The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview e Frameand
28. 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the GSM application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m IA Marker n 1 16 Window lt s gt 0 7 Slot lt t gt 1 4 Trace 11 3 Activating GSM Measurements GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTromenvOREate DUPLIiGate as cccc ce2csedesnsecdaesecaesdaidecdadeessaduddddedaiasdedadedeensdablaveedaass 138 INSTr mentOREatep NEW ceciren A A E ERO G ede 138 ll lee Ee EE 138 NSTUMEN dbldx eL E 139 Lef EN TEE 139 INS FromebbISENOSm eeg
29. 70 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max Spectrum IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex samples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 QTL Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 Q 2 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi 1 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 284 UO Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3
30. BURS IQOF SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further
31. CONFioureM lcCH AhNnel M otsMEAGure ener enne 188 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots sess 188 CONFioureM lcCH AhNnel M otsOFtzet nennen nnne nennt 188 RETIA RU RE E e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULU User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 187 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements AMET U c A emp Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure SlotToMeasure This command specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query lt SlotToMeasure gt Slot to measure in single slot measurements RST 0 Slots Default unit NONE Example CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 5 Manual operation See Slot to Measure on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots lt NofSlotsToMeas gt This command specifies the number of slots to measure for the measurement interval of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measure ments Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured Parameters for setting and query lt NofSlotsToMeas gt Number of slots to measure Range 1to8 RST 8 Slots Default unit NONE Example CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 5
32. Input dialog box TIE p D v id 4 K Ban e IL I x Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Input Settings External I Mod Mixer Q Mode Input Config Digital IQ Swap 1 Q Analog Baseband Signal Path Center Frequency CF P For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State iles ceeniaze ce ceeeeebataceneescacnaanaaeeeveedaa 75 fbl 75 DEU ett e O ee 76 E LE 76 euin MS 76 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 157 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase com ponent and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 the input signal is down converted first Low IF I ec ee d User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 75 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 4 1 4 Input and Frontend Settings Q Only
33. Measurement Settings eese eene nnne nennen niente nennen nnna 100 Adjusting Settings Automatically eese nnne 107 TU SS c uiu M 109 Result Configuratio E ENEE TESS ENEE 109 Display Configuratio EEN 115 SOERENSEN 116 I Q Data Import and Ex OU E 118 ufeieren d ET 118 How to Export and Import UO Data cecseeeeeeeseesseeeeereenen nent 119 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 122 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 122 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 123 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals eene 124 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals eene 126 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 129 Improving Performancce eeesseeeeeeeeen eene nennen RANNAN AAR ANNARA AREAN NAAR RANNA 129 Improving EVM ACCUracy ccceccccceeseeeeeeeeeenenseeeeeeeeeeseeeesseaeeseeeesseaeseeeesseanseeeseeeaaes 129 Optimizing Limit Checks eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneen nennen nennen nnn nennen nnn nnn nnn 130 Error Messages euet ER nete cfs cauvincied cresesuanedseeeseusansecieeoeseanee 131 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 132 Introduction eerte AA AE AARAA 132 Common SUES E 137 Ac
34. Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the figure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any com bination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 205 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements LEE UC Analyzing GSM Measurements LAYout WINDow n ADD Direction WindowType This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this command the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 for a list of available window types
35. R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EENEG Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameter value Window type PSTable Power vs Slot PTFull PvT Full Burst TGSGraph Trigger vs Sync Graph TGSTable Trigger to Sync Table TSFDomain Transient Spectrum Graph Frequency domain TSTable Transient Spectrum Table LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index lt WindowIndex gt numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result Zr e EL Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display eee User Man
36. Windows remote ees 200 Max Peak SOfIKGy degkeet tru Praed dva ra d 114 Measurement channel Creating remote eeo ertt rrr teres 138 Deleting remote mnn 139 Duplicating remote eene 138 Querying remote Renaming remote enne 140 Replacing remote een 138 Measurement filter SS Magnitude response 0 0 0 ee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 46 Measurement time Buc 181 Measure only on Sync sssss 99 Microbutton ProDES ER 77 Midamble SOC also NEE 37 Minimum Marker positioning eese 114 klein m 114 MKR gt CM E Modulation Default vi D IJependency deser Ee ege ege SOEN 46 Inverted UO remote sess 163 181 Inverted IQ acce et rnc eiae 76 92 Modes ENEE egeE Modes remote sesssssssseeeeenn Number of TSC bits rr RBW at 1800 KHZ oo eeeeeeeeceeee eeeeeeeeereeeeeeaeeeeeeees Modulation Accuracy Evaluation method cee eee cece eeeneeeeeeeeeeeee 18 Parameters tiet teet ieri 19 23 24 29 Results remote a crees 227 Modulation Spectrum Graph evaluation method eeseeseeseeserrerenrrenn Graph results remote ssssssesssss Limit check T Narrow Wide E S ltlirigs 6 niit thee
37. and Q values after data acquisition in the R amp S FSW GSM application to reverse this effect see Swap Q on page 76 RETREAT RE U User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 131 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Introduction 11 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Meas urements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the GSM application in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual ED Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following topics specific to the GSM application are described here LAN Lucii E U uU u 132 LA COMMON SUES E 137 e Activating GSM MeasureiTierits 2 ion toe ede eerte re AEN 137 e Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements AAA 142 e Analyzing GSM Meseurermmenge e ecciesie ciccce retener tiae ner eei HR ERR renes 200 e le 21
38. bits depending on burst type and modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO0 TSC USER must be defined first see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC on page 151 EEUU EA a User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 152 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt The slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt String containg the user defined bits e g 10101111101010101100111100 for a GMSK normal burst Example CONF CHAN SLOT TSC USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 68 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Table 11 2 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access Burst GMSK 41 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE BurstType Specifies the type of the burst Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt BurstType gt NB HB AB NB Normal Burst HB Higher Symbol Rate Burst AB Access Burst RST NB Example CONF CHAN SLOT TYPE NB Manual operation See Burst Type on page 67 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Pr
39. e WE 40 41 67 Active remote sesssesssssseeeenennennnes 148 Active part V ele Lee iren derer teet tte etre ca 65 97 bj Equal length A First slot to measure sees 65 97 First ito measure scientes 40 96 188 Limit line alignment is 102 DIUI e ogeend eee Number to measure Parameters dependency loud c Scope configuring esses Scope default er Scope defining nte retire rri retinerent Scope display tine edet EES Selecting Slot to measure Ei Statistical evaluation i Str ctl8 interrete Henr ees Tire alignment imde Useful part tinere i reges Softkeys Amplitude Config eese 79 Auto Level pr Capture Offset Continue Single Sweep ssssssssss 94 Continuous Sweep 93 IR ls L TEE 74 Display CONTIG sc rers cce eer ee nete fette ation 115 Export ES 2 87 Free R N niit rrt Eres 87 Frequency Config usd eB 87 M 88 Import x Iriput Frontend erre otn trennen 70 Input Source Config essssssssssee 70 IQ Export n IQ Import Marker Config 1 2 e cir o ort eterne ceti ide 110 Marker to T
40. ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 174 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 89 R amp S9FSW K10 Configuration 6 6 Data Acquisition Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 178 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 178 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Se
41. lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned RETE RU RE ITE E e e L 111LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLTLLLZLL User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 267 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements RNEAEMECA T AA H H m meas Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Status Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ WSP MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only FETCh WSPectrum MODulation REFerence READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Modulation Spectrum These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference p
42. m ee Measurement Settings When measuring access bursts the parameter Limit Time Alignment should be set to Per Slot since the position of an access burst within a slot depends on the set timing advance of the DUT Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign on page 193 6 8 2 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration GHz DJEVICE Aaii Power vs Time Spectrum Common Settings Modulation amp Transient Spectrum Enable Left Limit i On Enable Right Limit On Filter Type Normal 3dB 5 Pole Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List 1 8 MHz sparse Transient Spectrum Reference Power L Enable Left Limit Enable Right Livilt 2 0 trente eet Rete ettii 103 ZUS 022 EHE 104 Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List 4 eese tennis 104 Transient Spectrum Reference Power 104 Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit Controls whether the results for the frequencies to the left or to the right of the center frequency or both are considered in the limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement This parameter effects the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 and Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals using either the check on the left or right side only allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most chan
43. new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the PvT Full Burst results to determine if the signal remains within the limits specified by the standard in all slots to measure If the Limit Check indicates FAIL zoom into the Power vs Time graph to determine the time at which the power exceeded the limit Note in measurements according to standard the delta value will be identical for all slots in the scope due to the Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure setting see step 9 Check the irregular slot in more detail in the Magnitude Capture compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defining the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from b
44. the limit lines are indicated as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL is shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if either limit is exceeded 4 Transient Spectrum Graph 1 Max e2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Transient Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the required filtering The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 22 The following default settings are used for Transient Spectrum measurements User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 27 R amp SS9FSW K10 Measurement Results EMG EM CANI R J O UD Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to mea sure in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check Limit check of maximum Max trace See chapter 5 13 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum on page 54 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results TRACe n DATA o
45. 0 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 0 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 24 07130241394043 1 0950000286102295 14 060454368591309 Manual operation See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Amplitude Droop When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Amplitude Droop see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Amplitude droop Default unit dB ees User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 230 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PRNEMERCEE Oo P Retrieving Results Example READ BURS ADR SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum FETCh BURSt MAC
46. 0 0 0 5 5 MHz PCS 1900 1850 1910 1930 1990 1880 1960 80 512 810 0 0 0 0 0 0 MHz For these frequency bands there is no fixed ARFCN to frequency assignment instead it is calculated with aformula taking an OFFSET parameter which is signaled by a higher layer of the network The given ARFCNs assume an OFFSET value of 0 Modulation modes Different modulation modes are used in the GSM mobile radio network The original GSM modulation is GMSK with the normal symbol rate NSR of approximately 270 833 ksymb s exactly 1625 6 ksymb s This corresponds to a bit rate of 270 833 kbit s The details are specified in chapter 2 of SGPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation which is used within EDGE was introduced to increase the data rate on the physical link It uses the same symbol rate the normal symbol rate as GMSK 270 833 ksymb s but has a bit rate of 3 x 270 833 kbit s exactly 812 5 kbit s In this method three bits represent a symbol The details are specified in chapter 3 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 16QAM and 32QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the physical link They use the normal symbol rate 270 833 ksymb s but have bit rates of 4 x 270 833 kbit s or 5 x 270 833 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 4 3GP
47. 197 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing esses nennen rennen rennen rennen nrsetnn innen 239 READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate sese eene 268 READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL 267 STATus OPERation CONDItiOfi 2 trot Ais eerie aid EO Eaa E EEEE AREAS 261 STATus OPERation ENABlo 2 2 etti deet trente Peut nee Gn ah donee epa e a geregelt 261 AEN UR e Ee e RR Ee E 262 STATus OPERation PTRansition essessssssssssssssesseseeeeneneeen nennen nnns nnn nr tent entis nnn risn et NEE nr rennen sena 262 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 292 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands STATusObREbRanonl EVEN 260 STATUS PRESSLU EEN 260 STATusOUEG onable ACL mt CONDiton nennen nnne ennt eee enne 261 STATus QUEStionable ACPLEimit ENABIS 5 toner erit eret pereo eterne rera ra a Eee OX T eS 261 STATusOUEGtonable AC mn N Tanson 262 SGTATusOUEG onable AC mt P Ransiton eene nnne nennen etre n nnne 262 STATusOUEG onable ACL Im EVEN 261 STATus QUEStionable CONDIION 2 1 irridet ete Mean eee dee Reeder deed dae e dap 261 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition esses eene enne enne eene tnnt sen rre nnn nene n inna 258 STATusOUEGtonable DilO CONDion nennen enne n niet en nnns en rnn intres i nna 261 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABIe 2 6 1t rrr rrr rere ERR ER E redeant REP DAR 258 STATusOUEGtonable DilON
48. 2 reduced symbol periods For the Not Equal Timeslot Length case deriving the guard period length is somewhat more complicated and the possible values are summarized in Table 5 7 2 of SGPP TS 45 010 reproduced below as Guard period lengths between different timeslots for con venience Table 5 6 Guard period lengths between different timeslots Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot TS0 and TS1 or Any other timeslot TS4 and TS5 pair TS4 and TS5 pair normal symbol 9 8 10 8 9 6 period to normal symbol period normal symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to reduced symbol period User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 52 R amp SSFSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements P ZZ PQ Tz AB Delta to Sync Values Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot TS4 and TS5 pam TS4 and TS5 pair reduced symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to normal symbol period reduced symbol 9 5 8 5 11 4 10 2 period to reduced symbol period 5 11 Delta to Sync Values The Delta to Sync value is defined as the distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of the S
49. 224 Single carrier ss Statistic COUNT eo eter Ret ea dea 129 Troubleshooting causer rer teen ett 129 E EE 99 100 Exporting FUNCIONS er 118 UO data VQ data remote nennen 255 lU 118 External trigger Level remote one ette meine Ces 175 Iu clm 87 F gb E 32 279 File format VOW m 280 Files UO data binary XML ou eee eee crest eeeneeeeeee 284 UO parameter XML e Filters 5 pole Dependency High pass remote High pass RF input Measurement Measurement magnitude response 46 Modulation Spectrum 104 Multicarrier 42 43 puuiaE TENE 42 Do cc HE 42 44 PvT frequency response e 44 PvT step response n se ss 45 Resolution Spectrum results 104 Signal flow GSM nssssiseseesesseeesereenerreserrnesrrnsssnnserent 42 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 296 R amp S FSW K10 Index Transient Spectrum esses 104 YIG romote EE 156 Format Data remote i rider regen 220 iriure 33 Configuration Configuration automatic remote 198 Configuration Auto Set sssssssees 107 Multi 3 Searching EE 39 Mig REN 33 Free Run Trigger softkey esssssssseeseneenee 87 Frequency Bands nter a eres 33
50. 54 70 105 Auto frame configuration TS 45 010 re 198 TS 51 010 Auto l6Vell 2 tci ee etienne peu 199 268 TS 51 021 Reference l6Vel 5 n nter 107 8PSK e Softkey Measurement filter oorr errem 45 Auto Level Meer 67 Automatic Symbol period 48 49 COHfIQUF alio E 107 TOQUAM Zieser eege 32 35 279 Configuration remote sesssssseese 198 Measurement filter eee 45 Auto track time Modulation Remote control erit 199 Symbolperlod WE 48 49 Auto trigger offset acce eese dues 199 krass Measurement filter B Moden ET Symbol period cccceescssesesssestesesesescscecesesesesesees Band class Dice DS A Bandwidth DWNL IE T Aborting Coverage MSRA mode E ensieensces 93 94 Bins AC DC coupling rco entia arre nena case 71 Number as asco e i ce eot rtu rero ere erbe Ev se Toss 106 Access bursts BTS vi 279 Limit line time alignment ssessseeeeeineeseenerer neen 103 Class E e 10 Activating Multicarrier filter MM 44 Ve RE 137 Multiple carriers 43 69 101 Active probe Number of active carriers sess 70 Mierobutton rrr teen terere trn 77 Single carrier filter es 44 Adaptive Data Size get ed ed eegend 106 Burst Alignment ACCESS AB s t eiie eegdEe gege Eege 67 68 Limit lines n
51. 64 78 Bands default 3 ne nre trenes Bands GSM standard Configuration remote Configuration Softkey IOP DING WE 33 List Sample rate m List Spectrum limit lines essssessssss 103 List Modulation Spectrum Table 104 List sparse Frequency offset Frontend ConfIQUratiori EE 70 Configuration remote ssssssss 155 166 Fullscale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 162 Full scale level rrem NN Digital UO remote ge Unit digital UO remote esses 160 G c c ace 32 35 279 Measurement filter eene 45 Modulation P UIT ELM m 67 GPRS m E rere EE le POTOG Cmm 52 H Hardware settings NIE rtt tree re er x rire Higher symbol rate High pass filter Bc 156 RF input 2 72 HSCSD renes 96 279 HSR Higher symbol rate sessssssses 32 35 Hysteresis lee dponain n a a a aN 89 l UO correlation threshold seeeeeeeeeeeee 99 UO data Export file binary data description 284 Export file parameter description EXPOMING ME 59 119 Exporting Importing esses 119 Exporting remote
52. A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 284 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 282 R amp S9FSW K10 Annex Reference aa a GNO ID ac epa UO Data File Format iq tar Element Description UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xs
53. Commands to Perform GSM Measurements LAMENTA O T n Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 71 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON
54. Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 9 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application Starting the GSM Application 2 Welcome to the GSM Application The R amp S FSW K10 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform GSM measurements to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW K10 features e Measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the Third Generation Part nership Project 3GPP standards for GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution EGPRS2 and Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS e Measurement in time frequency or UO domains e Measurement of signals ith GMSK AQPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation normal or higher symbol rate e Measurement of signals using different Tx filters e g narrow and wide pulse e Measurements for Po
55. DUT SONOS crci er ettet aei Ee 63 e oic e LE 65 e WMult carrier SettingS c 0 2 ccc eeeedaecee cece reinen nnne nunmehr nnne renean 69 6 3 1 Frame and DUT Settings Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test The Frame settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then switch to the Frames tab Frame Slot Multi Carrier Device Under Test Device Type BTS Normal Frequency Band Power Class Frame Configuratior Equal Time Slot Lengths Select Slot to Configure Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available BTS Normal BTS Micro BTS Pico MS Normal MS Small User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 63 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration SSS SS ie i Signal Description The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 142 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 33 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 144 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAN
56. GSM Application Understanding the Display Information MultiView GSM Ref Level 50 0 Offset 0 00 dB Device Band BTS Normal 35M 900 SGL Att Freq ARFCN 935 0 MHz D Count 200 200 1 Magnitude Capture 1 Cira ALES 20 0 ms 2 PvT Full Burst 2 o 12 5 ps 3 Modulation Accuracy 4 Power vs Slot Current Average Std Dev HE EVM t Current Frame Mag Error fk c Ri Frames Phase Error 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available An orange back ground behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 16 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 56 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the GSM application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Ref Level 50 00 dBm Offset 00 c Device Band BTS Normal E GSM 900 SGL Att 20 dB Freq ARFCN 9 VHz 0 Slot Scope z2 2 2 Count 200 200 Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenu
57. MSFD Result 2 INITiate IMMediate JI Switch off the display of all available traces DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel1 MODE BLANK DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE BLANK JI Switch on the display of all available traces again DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE AVERage DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE WRITe See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 See Trace Mode on page 110 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 208 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements aua a CC NI R PJ eed Analyzing GSM Measurements Table 11 4 Available traces and trace modes for the result diplays Measurement Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture WRITe 2 EVM AVERage MAXHold MINHold WRITe Phase Error Magnitude Error PvT Full Burst Modulation Spec AVERage WRITe trum Graph Transient Spectrum Graph Trigger to Sync WRITe PDFavg 11 5 2 2 Marker Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured e Individual Marker Gettnge AAA 209 e General Marker Seling see RE hates AE d dE pea doit ea abdo cupa E 211 e Marker Positioning Setllngs euer eterne eret erau eria ENEE ENEE 211 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evalua
58. Manual operation See Number of Slots to measure on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet lt FirstSlotToMeas gt This command specifies the start for the measurement interval for multi slot measure ments i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query FirstSlotToMeas 0 based index for the first slot to measure relative to the GSM frame start RST 0 Slots Default unit NONE Example CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 5 Manual operation See First Slot to measure on page 96 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 188 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements RNEMECAE A J 4 u pr Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements 11 4 6 2 Demodulation The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection CONEIourel MS SNCMODE 189 CONFigure MS SYNOSONE TEE 190 CONFigure RER d le e TT EE 190 EE Le Ui MS RI Ee EE 190 GONFigure MS DEMod STBBits 2 reri cer rnt n uhr nn ERR nahen ER ENEE 191 CONFigure MS SYNC MODE Mode This command sets the synchronization mode of the
59. Measurements TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Slope on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can con tinue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate EE User Manual 1173 9263 0
60. Modulation specific parameters such as the phase error EVM or spectrum due to modulation are determined Multi slot measure ments analyze a slot scope of up to 8 consecutive slots each of which has different burst modulation characteristics For example power vs time limit checks are performed over a fully occupied GSM frame or the spectrum due to transient measurements is deter mined Statistical evaluation of several measurements is also possible Finally the GSM mea surement results can be exported to other applications User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 14 R amp S FSW K10 4 Measurement Results Measurement Results The data that was captured by the R amp S FSW GSM application can be evaluated using various different methods All evaluation methods available for the GSM measurement are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following pd Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu e Press the MEAS key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the GSM measurement results are displayed in the following windows e Magnitude Capture e PvT Full Burst e Modulation Accuracy Power vs Slot The following evaluation methods are available for GSM measurements EE
61. R amp S FSW K10 Parameters for setting and query Mode ALL TSC BURSt NONE ALL First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration ALL is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a cor relation with the given TSC This mode can be used for continous but framed signals or bursted signals BURSt Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modula tion Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported NONE Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be ana lyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modula tion Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported RST ALL Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Manual operation See Synchronization on page 98 User Ma
62. RR nOn Rt e Ree 261 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 262 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part tette t ee deae netten 262 11 8 3 1 General Status Register Commands STATUS PRES Elurtea a a a a a a aa a anda 260 STATUS Biz 260 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detec ted All NTRansition parts are set to O i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only 11 8 3 2 Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt EEUU RA I UT EE 7 1 1 1 1 1 1LLLLLLTOTOTAULLLLLLLLLCLLCLCLLLCACAACAUAAAUUL S g User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 260 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 8 3 3 11 8 3 4 Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt Cha
63. Radio Frequency Channel Number which identifies the frequency channel within the specific frequency band The GSM channel spacing is 200 kHz Communication between a mobile and a base station can be either frequency continuous or frequency discrete distributed across various frequency channels FDMA In the standard the abbreviation SFH slow frequency hopping is used to designate the latter mode of communication Uplink and downlink Base stations and mobiles communicate in different frequency ranges the mobile sends in the uplink UL and the base station in the downlink DL The frequencies specified in the standard plus their channel numbers ARFCN are shown in the figure and table below User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 33 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Frequency MHz 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 H in T GSM 380 d E T GSM 410 Wi GSM 450 n GSM 480 GSM 710 Da z GSM 750 en o T GSM 810 E eg 2 GSM 850 H P GSM 900 F ed E GSM 900 We R GSM 900 ER i T GSM 900 ud ie DCS 1800 Fr PCS 1900 ne Fig 5 1 The frequencies specified in the GSM standard Table 5 2 Frequencies and channel numbers ARFCN in the GSM standard Band Class UL Fre DL Fre Fre Band UL ARFCN MHz quen MHz
64. See Filter Type on page 104 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum measure ments see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or Exter nal and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 4 4 Triggering Measurements on page 173 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Result 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 E M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 197 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements REEL T e Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Usage Query only 11 4 7 3 T
65. TSC bits as set using CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT cs TSC are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incorrect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 16 at the positions of the incorrect bits RST DETected Example Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Exam ple Determining the EVM on page 269 Manual operation See Tail amp TSC Bits on page 100 Measurement Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed E DEIOBEIUI ENERO 192 UE d o MD ER 194 LS ooo Ri MERITI ITem 198 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 2 Power vs Time Filter on page 44 CONFloure BURGCbTEMpolate El Ter 192 CONFigure MS MCARNer FILTET iai iee cedo cu pana coc eat ta nere cea ek onere Nia ED nated 193 GONFigure BURSEPTEMplaieTALIgR chiot eR retta cda RR bn eee tne Nena 193 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer Type The PvT Filter controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for single carrier Power vs Time measurements The parameter is only available if Multicarrier BTS is switched off see CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs on
66. TSC is the reference point This parameter affects how the center of the TSC is determined for each slot e Slot to measure default For each slot the center of the TSC is derived from the measured center of the TSC of the Slot to Measure and the timeslot lengths specified in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 and Equal Timeslot Length on page 64 e Per Slot For each slot the center of the TSC is measured This provides reasonable time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard Note that in this case the Power vs Time limit check may show pass even if the timeslot lengths are not correct according to the standard Note The Limit Time Alignment also decides whether the Delta to sync values of the Power vs Time list result are measured for Limit Time Alignment Per Slot or if they are constant as defined by the 3PP standard for Limit Time Alignment Slot to measure The R amp S FSW GSM application offers a strictly standard conformant multiple slot PvT limit line check This is based on time alignment to a single specified slot the Slot to Measure and allows the user to check for correct BTS timeslot alignment in the DUT according to the GSM standard In addition a less stringent test which performs PvT limit line alignment on a per slot basis Per Slot is also available Note _L_L_____L____ N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 102 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration
67. This command starts the measurement to read out the maximum power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 245 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT
68. achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter TT User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 133 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 Introduction Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instan ces of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a measurement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compliance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and yo
69. an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Modulation Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB imi A to Limit 106 Note The graphical results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 The following values are displayed EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 22 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results Table 4 5 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured kHz Power Nega Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency tive Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Note Normal vs Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers both a normal and a wide modulation spectrum were available for GSM measurements In the R amp S FSW GSM application only one evaluation is p
70. and higher frequencies Note The frequency list also determines the used sample rate see Sample rate on page 91 1 8 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was refer red to as narrow 1 8 MHz More compact version of 1 8 MHZ The sample rate is 6 5 MHz sparse 6 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was refer red to as wide 6 MHz More compact version of 6 MHz The sample rate is 19 5 MHz sparse Remote command CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect on page 196 Transient Spectrum Reference Power This setting is only required by the Transient Spectrum evaluation see Transient Spec trum Graph In this evaluation the power vs spectrum for all slots in the slot scope is evaluated and checked against a spectrum mask To determine the relative limit values a reference power is required In order to detect irregularities it is useful to define the peak power as a reference However the standard requires the reference power to be calculated from the RMS power Note __L___SSS Se LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULUA LLLLLA X User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 104 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REENEN Measu
71. and symbol decision instants This is illustrated in figure 5 16 You can see that for normal symbol period bursts Normal bursts the middle of TSC for GMSK occurs exactly at the decision instant of symbol 74 However for EDGE it occurs between the decision instants of symbols 73 and 74 while for reduced symbol period bursts Higher Symbol Rate bursts it occurs exactly at the decision instant of symbol 88 EDGE Symbol 73 Decision GMSK Symbol 74 Decision EDGE Symbol 74 Decision n 72 73 74 75 76 147 Normal Symbol Periods Middle of Midamble Reduced Symbol Periods Symbol 88 Decision Fig 5 16 Middle of TSC for normal and reduced symbol period bursts Timeslot alignment within the frame The standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 provides details on the alignment of slots within the GSM frame ERREUR RA UT E E e e 1 1 1LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULL LI User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 51 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Timeslot Alignment Optionally the BTS may use a timeslot length of 157 normal symbol periods on timeslots with TN 0 and 4 and 156 normal symbol periods on timeslots with TN 1 2 3 5 6 7 rather than 156 25 normal symbol periods on all timeslots The alignment of slots therefore falls under the Not Equal Timeslot Length Equal Time slot Length off or the Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length on criterion see also Equal Timeslot L
72. attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 172 INPut EATT AUTO on page 172 INPut EATT on page 172 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 70 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 82 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration H Input and Frontend Settings 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 170 INPut GAIN VALue on page 170 6 4 4 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For detail
73. bits by the standard bits Programming Examples CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD fees PvT Measurement settings Use Gaussian PvT filter with 500 kHz for single carrier BTS CONF BURS PTEM FILT G500 Align the limit line to mid of TSC for each slot CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL eese Spectrum Measurement settings Absolute power and limit remote results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Use compact version of narrow frequency list to save time CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NSParse 7 Performing the Measurements INITiate IMMediate WAI Read trace data in binary format FORMat DATA REAL 32 Query current magnitude capture trace data TRAC1 DATA TRACe1 gt trace data Query the current power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe4 gt trace data Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 1 Query max EVM trace data TRAC5 DATA TRACe2 trace data Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in current measurement FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX gt 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames
74. can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 186 For Trigger to Sync measurements use the SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent command to query the number of data acquisitions that contribute to the current result Usage Query only SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of data acquisitions that contribute to the Trigger to Sync result It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 186 For GSM measurements other than Trigger to Sync use the SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent command to query the number of frames or measurements that con tribute to the current result Usage Query only Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated The commands for frame and slot configuration are described in chapter 11 4 1 1 Frame on page 142 and chapter 11 4 1 2 Slot on page 147 11 4 6 1 Blot S60D6 eene ere re ent ret E e eodera PRO EE ERR ee staat Er eer 187 e iemodBlaHlon eee eet entra eene reed esee e px E er aea dads 189 Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40
75. command defines the format of the input signal EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 162 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 2 4 Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements IQ 1 Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resam pled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 167 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 167 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IO TYPE O See 1 Q Mode on page 75 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Try this function
76. default 500 kHz Gauss for backwards compatibility to FS K5 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 101 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REENEN Measurement Settings 600 kHz for backwards compatibility to FS K5 Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer on page 192 Multicarrier PvT Filter Controls the filter used to reduced the measurement bandwidth for multicarrier Power vs Time measurements The parameter is only available if Multicarrier BTS is switched on see Multicarrier BTS on page 69 For further details on filtering in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 7 Over view of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application on page 42 The following filters are supported Note The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels 400 kHz default Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power 300 kHz Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six chan nels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer on page 193 Limit Line Time Alignment Controls how the limit lines are aligned in a Power vs Time measurement graph see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Limit lines are defined for each slot The limit lines are time aligned in each slot based on the position of the TSC the center of the
77. ebbe nte dene Table evaluation method T Table frequency list esses Table results remote sssssessssssss MS Mobile Station ssssssssss MSRA Analysis interval ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 92 180 Operating mode seseesseesseseeeeensesrernntreesrernnsssrsenne 56 MSRA applications Capture Onset 2 1 tn e tse aie 92 Capture offset remote sss 217 MSRA Master Data coverage id ctr e ete wisest 57 Multicarrier BTS LE UE 102 SGUINGS aree iere erben Attias 69 Sale cete deri andere ise i OE REDDE 69 101 Multiple Measurement channels sse 11 Multiple carriers EVM ails 130 Lirmit CHECK sis uin rne eerie 130 Multiple ZOOM NEE 116 N Narrow pulSe rette eege iren aris 32 49 99 germ 67 Noise elt 83 Normal bursts iusserit n nenne 35 50 ene Le EE 99 Normal symbol period see also Normal symbol period 48 NSR Normal symbol rate ee CH Number of Slots to measure Demod 188 O Offset Analysis interval eir rr roe tira anani 92 Frequency Reference level Optimizing Measurements riri e reb e enge eres 129 Options Electronic attenuation B25 ssssss 82 High pass filter B13 Preamplifier B24
78. for Mobile Communication HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switch Data IF Intermediate Frequency MS Mobile Station NSP Normal Symbol Period PCL Power Control Level PDF Probability Density Function PvT Power vs Time QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 279 R amp S FSW K10 Annex Reference SSS SL UO Data File Format iq tar SCPIR Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SFH Slow Frequency Hopping TDMA Time Division Multiplex Access TSC Training Sequence Code UL Uplink BTS to MS VAMOS Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot YIG Yttrium Iron Garnet A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Compar ison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar
79. for Modulation Spectrum on page 54 Table 4 4 Frequencies and filter bandwidths in modulation spectrum measurements Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 100 30 30 200 30 30 250 30 30 400 30 30 600 30 30 800 30 30 1000 30 30 1200 30 30 1400 30 30 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 21 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results EHEMGNSGNE EEEMCCGNC CD SEQ H aen Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 1600 30 30 1800 30 or 100 30 or 100 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 252 Modulation Spectrum Table The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by measuring the average power in this part over several frames The Modulation Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if either limit is exceeded Values that exceed either limit are indicated by red characters and
80. form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the command uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 135 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quan tities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric val
81. frequency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 169 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 79 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class put Settir Preamplifier Balu eris meis EE o 1 Offset raiser SH ttenuation Aene AA Value Be 80 Reference Level M taadas 81 L Shifting the Display Oel esias ipne Mutat duod 81 Mechanical AttenuatiO M nines aa n a a a aaa a aa a 81 L Attenuation Mode Value tenenens 81 Using Electronic Attenuation Option BZ 82 luede
82. function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level esses 107 Automatic Frame ConfIguration 1 oreet rediit dae eri ieee 107 Automatic Trigger Offset ic esee rennen eren tree Rennen ne nna aaa 108 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 199 Automatic Frame Configuration When activated a single auto frame configuration measurement is performed Note This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active The auto frame configuration measurement may take a long time therefore it is deacti vated by default The following parameters are detected and automatically measured Active slots Slot configuration burst type modulation filter TSC Equal time slot length For VAMOS normal burst and GMSK TSCs of set 1 and set 2 For VAMOS normal burst and AQPSK TSCs of both subchannels rest
83. iere in cnt ten epe uten ch2gi cech ER 170 dye pU AE Er 170 NPUEGAINDYAL UG occ accionar ces event ral edt cod ab drca Fe reda 170 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters Value numeric value the unit depends on the result display Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Relative Scaling Reference per Division on page 115 See Per Division on page 115 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 169 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM NI R JH J n m Gn gnam Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 81 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Reference Level on page 81 See Shifting the Displa
84. if the TSC can not be found Parameters lt State gt Manual operation Setting up Probes ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF See Swap Q on page 76 Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 163 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements a O SS at Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements ISGENGe JP OBe pDzID PDAhTnumber ether tnter tenens 164 SENSe PROBesSps BD SRNutibeli 2 2 5 tI EECHER 164 SENS amp PROBesp SETUpIMODE acci ENEE tento cue Lata erae pea aaia en aad 164 SENSE ee E E Ne E 165 SENSe PROBeSps SETUpIS ER 165 SENS PROBesp gt SETUP YET iiio cete eer detener hh a RIED HER RADAR AER 166 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF curr
85. in Free Run mode Refer to chapter 6 5 Trigger Settings on page 85 to learn more about appropriate trigger settings and to chapter 6 3 Signal Description on page 63 for information on the frame slot configuration Refer to chapter 6 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 107 to learn more about setting the trigger offset automatically 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement The R amp S FSW GSM application is slot based It can measure up to 8 consecutive GSM slots 1 frame and store the power results for all slots Power vs Time and Power vs Slot measurements see PvT Full Burst on page 25 and Power vs Slot on page 24 for slot In this documentation we use the term burst when the signal behaves like a pulse i e power is ramped up and down The up ramp is referred to as the rising edge the down ramp as the falling edge A burst may occur within one or more slots which is a measure of time in the captured signal Thus a burst may coincide with a slot but it must not necessarily do so D In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers the term burst was used synonymously Usually only slots in which a burst is expected are of interest Such slots are defined as active slots in the signal description Within this slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea Sure a single slot Slot to Measure is selected for a more detailed analysis e g Modulation Accur
86. in MSRA mode For details see chapter 8 I Q Data Import and Export on page 118 Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 255 How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process UO data such as the I Q Ana lyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting I Q data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name Dm om mF o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 119 R amp S FSW K10 UO Data Import and Export mA JU How to Export and Import I Q Data Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that sup ports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the E Open icon in the toolbar Select the UO Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension oa F o bh Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and display
87. it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corre sponding standard for GSM 200 kHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard radio signals is how each data chan nelis correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced in firmware version 1 60 The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the mea surement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit diagrams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval 2PvTFulBurst ooo Trig
88. must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 281 R amp S9FSW K10 Annex Reference UO Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all channels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock frequency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e co
89. next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just IF Power Parameters Period RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Holdoff on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trigger sources EEEEETEUIUTUR RA TMN User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 174 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PREGA NIC R w g nn m Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Hysteresis on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt por
90. of the frequency pulse occurs at the beginning of the first symbol period i e at t 0 E E e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU LUULSZUA User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 47 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 9 2 Definition of the Symbol Period GMSK Frequency Pulse Frequency o o o ho Lu A e 25 2 15 1 0 5 0 5 1 15 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Phase Decision Instant Phase radio Symbol Period Q 25 2 45 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 12 GMSK Frequency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The EDGE transmit pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a linearised GMSK pulse as illustrated at the top of figure 5 13 Note that according to the definition in the standard the center of the pulse occurs at 2 5 T where T is the normal symbol period NSP The baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols 4 is defined in the standard as y t M s t iT 2T Baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 2 where C t the transmit pulse Note that the standard specifies The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit a
91. of this option depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY on page 190 UO Correlation Threshold This threshold determines whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is acti vated If the correlation value between the ideal UO signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the UO correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Note If the R amp S FSW GSM application is configured to measure GMSK normal bursts a threshold below 97 will also accept 8PSK normal bursts with the same TSC for analysis In this case activate Measure only on Sync and set the I Q Correlation Thresh old to 9796 This will exclude the 8PSK normal bursts from the analysis Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold on page 190 Symbol Decision The symbol decision determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator Set ting this parameter does not affect the demodulation of normal bursts with GMSK mod ulator For normal bursts with BPSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or higher symbol rate bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parameter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the R amp S FSW GSM application and measurement speed Auto Automatically selects the symbol decision method Linear Linear symbol decision
92. operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 82 11 4 4 Triggering Measurements Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured e Configuring the Triggering Conditloris acceded iets 173 e Configuring the Trigger ODIDUU iiec nete PE nene gedd eege geed 178 11 4 4 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure the trigger for the GSM measurement TRIGSger SEQuence BBPowerdHOEbBuolf 2 erri NEEN 173 TRlGoert GtOuencelD TlMe ener nnn nne rere nh tenen nennen nnns nnne 174 TRIGgerSEQuehcelHOEBotT FIME EE 174 TRIGGer SEQuence IFPowerHOLDDOft eerte conet Catone diane 174 TRlGoert GtOuencelltbowerHvGTeresls eene nnne tenens 174 IRIGger SEQuehce EEVel BBPOWeE 121 2 epa e2 ote EE Ade tee aaa aa Aaa ERI Neu RES 175 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelEEXTernal porte eii ceci cree eint enh n knit 175 TRIGger SEQuence LEVEI POWOF 1 ore pepe erotico Re Regine bh A S NGE 175 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel JObower enne enne nen nnns 176 TRIGger SEQuebcel EEVel RPPOWeE ctetur reat icto ne packed oie enata aa ee n tede pennis 176 TRIGger SEQuence RFPowerlQOEDoff oie retenti aede e cote eer 176 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPE A 177 TRiGgen SEQWeNnce SOURCES ES 177 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requi
93. page 154 There fore the PvT Filter parameter in the Multicarrier tab is ignored in the single carrier case EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 192 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt Example Manual operation B600 Default Lowpass 600 kHz G500 Gaussian Filter 500 kHz G1000 Gaussian Filter 1000 kHz RST G1000 CONF BURS PTEM FILT G500 See Single Carrier PvT Filter on page 101 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer Type This command controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for multi carrier Power vs Time measurements Parameters for setting and query Type Example Manual operation MC400 MC300 MC400 Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels RST MC400 CONF MCAR FILT MC400 See Multicarrier PvT Filter on page 102 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign Mode This command controls the time alignment
94. quen quen DL cy cy cy Shift Mid dle Low Up Low Up UL DL Range 1 Range 2 T GSM 380 380 2 389 8 390 2 399 8 385 0 395 0 10 0 481 MHz T GSM 410 410 2 419 8 420 2 429 8 415 0 425 0 10 0 48 B MHz GSM 450 450 4 457 6 460 4 467 6 454 0 464 0 10 259 293 MHz GSM 480 478 8 486 0 488 8 496 0 482 4 492 4 10 306 340 MHz GSM 710 698 0 716 0 728 0 746 0 707 0 737 0 30 0 90 MHz GSM 750 747 0 762 0 777 0 792 0 754 5 784 5 30 438 511 MHz T GSM 810 806 0 821 0 851 0 866 0 813 5 858 5 45 0 751 MHz GSM 850 824 0 849 0 869 0 894 0 836 5 881 5 45 128 251 MHz P GSM 900 890 0 915 0 935 0 960 0 902 5 947 5 45 1 124 MHz LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 34 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements i a es a Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Band Class UL Fre DL Fre Fre Band UL ARFCN MHz quen MHz quen quen DL cy cy cy Shift Mid dle Low Up Low Up UL DL Range 1 Range 2 E GSM 900 880 0 915 0 925 0 960 0 897 5 942 5 45 0 124 975 1023 MHz R GSM 900 876 0 915 0 921 0 960 0 895 5 940 5 45 0 124 955 1023 MHz T GSM 900 870 4 876 0 915 4 921 0 873 2 918 2 45 0 281 MHz DCS 1800 1710 1785 1805 1880 1747 1842 95 512 885 0
95. results Value Description SCPI query for result value Slot Analyzed slot number in frame s 0 7 PvT Power vs Time limit for the power vs time trace of the slot READ BURSt SPOWer Limit defined by the standard SLOT Slot LIMit FAIL on page 247 Delta to The distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of READ BURSt SPOWer Sync the Slot to Measure SLOT lt Slot gt DELTatosync NSP NSP stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration Op Page 246 of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The measured Delta to Sync value has a resolution of 0 02 NSP For details see chapter 5 11 Delta to Sync Values on page 53 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 24 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results EEG GNE CON OD C J w nw P aen Value Description SCPI query for result value Power Average power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer Avg SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage dBm on page 243 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL AVERage on page 240 Power Maximum power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer Peak SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum dBm on page 245 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum on page 242 Crest Crest factor in slot in current or all frames i e Power READ BURSt SPOWer dB Peak Po
96. rightmost bit corresponds to subchannel 2 Table 5 4 AQPSK symbol mappings reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 Modulating bits for AQPSK symbol in polar notation a b Si 0 0 eic 0 1 eja 1 0 e 1 1 eja The AQPSK modulation constellation diagram is shown in figure 5 4 where the value a is an angle related to the SCPIR as follows SCPIRyg 20 log oltan a dB User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 38 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 5 Trigger settings 1 0 0 0 X f X d X ij t B 1 1 0 1 Fig 5 4 AQPSK constellation reproduced from 3GPP change request document GP 100275 Trigger settings The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode however an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements To perform meas urements the R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time reference The R amp S FSW GSM application searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition The required search effort depends on the trigger mode Consider the following trigger mode settings In Free Run mode i e without any trigger the GSM application totally relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start The start of a measurement is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For an unambiguous frame configuration the GSM application searches for the frame start
97. the Data Acquisition softkey e Data Acquisition sie ee Pv Pea Meses Meses atate etum aede EE CES 91 EE Io HET 93 6 6 1 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Data Acquisition Sweep Capture Settings Sample Rate 6 5 MHz Analysis Bandwidth 5 2 MHz Capture Time 100 0 ms swap 1 Q Con ul Sample GANG ccc D M 91 Analysis Bard oi E 91 TENNIS 92 Gapture INS Oli i 5 ccccecsass UEM 92 PL ee 92 Sample rate The sample rate for UO data acquisition is indicated for reference only It is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also chapter 6 8 2 Spectrum on page 103 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 181 Analysis Bandwidth The analysis bandwidth is indicated for reference only It defines the flat usable band width of the final UO data This value is dependent on the Frequency list and the defined signal source The following rule applies E User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 91 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration aS eS Data Acquisition analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to an input sample rate of 200 MHz Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 181 Capture Time Specifies the duration and theref
98. the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 112 See Marker Type on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 112 LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 210 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM CIC R H H T a mq Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to4 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manua
99. the example below instead Parameters for setting and query State 1 0 ON OFF RST 0 Example Switch on mode for multicarrier BTS measurements CONFigure MS MCARrier STATe ON Note With the next command a multicarrier pre filter for the Demod measurements is also activated internally Switch on mode for multicarrier BTS measurements CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs ON Select K5 compatible multicarrier pre filter for PVT measure ment CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer MC300 Mode GSM Input Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources Such as RF power sen sors etc and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output OMM alic 155 e Configuring Digital l Q Input and Output ence eadera zar 157 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B7f1 161 Setting Up dos REEL 163 e Confouringtie OUPS eena Een cx iem n eec tento eae ldeianeedeengeieaes 166 RF Input INPutATTenuati n PROTection RESET 21i iere Da etat rt ENEE RIA RR Een dE 156 E ee ET 156 ET TN le E Eu E E 156 INPULFIET Sr YIGES TAT C H 156 INPURIM Ped ane oe ette tinte loe eie agni ete apache apa qc xia dots blades 157 IPR SEG n 157 I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 155 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote
100. the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 114 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 114 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 212 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements pem M M M MR RUHR R HE UE An
101. to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Mechanical Attenuation on page 81 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 172 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 82 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 82 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 172 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Deeg Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual
102. trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 Free Run lt Trigger Source lt Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 88 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 84 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 84 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on pag
103. visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 218 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 217 Multiple Zoom Ee In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 219 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 218 Restore Original Display Q User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 116 Zoom Functions Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 218 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 219 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 218 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 219 for each multiple zoom window R amp S FSW K10 I Q Data Import and Export Import Export Functions 8 1 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called
104. 0 rnt nre 15 Default 60 EVM m HM 16 Magnitude Capture sssesessisesseiieeiresenrntesrnnesrenee 16 Magnitude Error uin AT Marker t bl nnne tentent 18 Modulation Accuracy sseeeee 18 Modulation Spectrum Graph dii 20 Modulation Spectrum Table 22 Phase Error P 23 Power vs Slot s 24 PYT Ell BUTS scirent etri 25 Transient Spectrum Graph ssssssssss 27 Transient Spectrum Table 28 Trigger to Sync Graph sessssssese 29 Trigger to Sync Table sss 30 Results Data format remote sse 220 EVM remote 1 2 2 entre rete te E 224 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 299 R amp S FSW K10 Index Magnitude Capture esses 223 Magnitude Capture remote usuus 225 Magnitude Error remote Modulaiton Accuracy remote Modulation Spectrum Graph remote Modulation Spectrum Table remote kon is Per SIOL riru Ee ENS Phase Error remote sssssssesseses Power vs Slot remote m dre PvT Full Burst remote 000 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees Reference power ssssssssssssssrsessrtrerrnserseserrrennnenss Reference slot s Result summary eessssssssseseeenneetn Trace data query remote sssssssss Transient Spectrum r
105. 02 05 286 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands CONFigtire MS PARE Ci MC cestentenk cs CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE AAA CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE AE CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE AAA Elie Ui RO EN TT en DE gl Tele Die RER ER E e EN CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal CONFiourel M lcCHANnel M ois MEAGure 188 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots esses 188 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet essen nee ener 188 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer essen nennen 147 CONFiourelM lcCHANnel SL OT cNumber Mie 148 CONFiourel M tCHANnel SL OTchNumberz Avance 151 CONFiourelM lcCHANnel SL OT cNumberz TE 153 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number STATe essere 148 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC cccceccseceseeseneeereeeeereseeeeereeaeeeeeeneeeeeneeateees 150 CONFiourelM lcHANnel SL Oe GUBChannel zchz TeCUSER 150 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt S gt TSC cecccecceceseeeeeeeeeceeececeaeeaeeeaeeseeeaesseeeaessaeeaeesaesaeeeaeeaeseaeeaeeeaeeaeenas 151 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TGCUSER tnat 152 CONFigure MSTDEMOGd DBEGCisIOn 1 iti perro prz ee tibt dp tee etiradi dei dapd ea ond dap dc d Red 190 CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits essent nennen ennt 191 CONFigure MS DBEVICe 2T YPE uet sites eget e
106. 10 3 Optimizing Limit Checks Excluding results from adjacent channels For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers configure the DUT as such in the signal description see chapter 6 3 3 Multicarrier Settings on page 69 In this case an additional multicarrier PvT filter suppresses power from adjacent channels This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal otherwise there would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the reference signal Define which PvT filter to use depending on whether the channel to be measured has a reduced or equal power compared to its adjacent channels see Multicarrier PvT Filter on page 102 For single carrier measurements make sure the Multicarrier BTS setting is Off see Multicarrier BTS on page 69 so the correct PvT filter is used for the power measure ment Optimizing Limit Checks If the limit checks fail unexpectedly check the following issues Excluding results from adjacent channels In limit checks for multicarrier spectrum measurements the frequencies from adjacent carriers in the signal may distort the results of the limit check for a single carrier If you only want to check the frequencies from a single carrier in a multicarrier signal disable the limit check for frequencies to the left or right of the carrier frequency of interest see Enable Left Limit Enable R
107. 2 isian teu cocee pe ibn eren tee va Lek epo de aen AE Ed HR Evene is 160 INPUt BIOFRANGE UP PGR E 160 INPuCDIORANGet Uppert UNITA 160 IS ua Re EN ES 160 INPUT DIG SRA TC AUT e m Es 161 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 158 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PRENNE EM GNCCM X HC A Ju eme Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify t
108. 2 05 177 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 4 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Source on page 86 See Free Run on page 87 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 87 See IQ Power on page 87 See IF Power on page 88 See RF Power on page 88 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 84 OUTPut TRIGgereport DIReCIDn riii ecran eene aeu erue anre hue kn eek Rha ener n RR n EE 178 OLTPut PRIGSerepan DEE 178 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe 2 ierra ederet eset RR Tea Ee RR LH REED OR Side 179 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate ec eeeciininer enne nnn hann nin tatnen 179 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGIh esses rennen enne nennen 180 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2
109. 2 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application SENE SAP cua tr aa Sra aco ara d lor ade narra 181 SENSe SWEep TIME eese ttn ttt tette tte teens t taane 181 TRACHO SRAT SE 181 WRC CG BVI EE 181 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 180 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EMI R Y X t es Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Try this function if the TSC can not be found Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j I OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 76 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep or data capture time Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 92 TRACe IQ SRATe
110. 3 on page 84 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe _L____LL TM User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 178 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Suffix port Parameters Level Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW See Trigger 2 3 on page 84 See Output Type on page 84 See Level on page 84 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputType gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Parameters lt OutputType gt Manual operation 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered internally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice See Trigger 2 3 on page 84 See Output Type on page 84 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This comma
111. 36 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent esses essen 236 FETOCHBURGOCMACCuracvlPERbRor PEAkK MAximum eene 236 FETOChBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor PEAK GDEMlatton iniirog 236 READ BURStEMACCu raecy PERRO PEAK AVERaQE nen 236 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orPEAkK CURent 236 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum esesssssseseseeen nnne 236 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation cceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeneneeeees 236 FETCHBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor RMG AVEHRage nennen 237 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent essere nennen 237 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERbRor RMG MANImum cece enne nnne 237 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation KEREN REENEN 237 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERb orHRMG AVEHRage 237 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orHRMGCUbRbent A 237 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXIMUM P niecne nennen 237 READ BURSt MACCu racy PERRO RMG GDtEViaton icini nanena 237 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ALL READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL This command starts the measurement and returns all the modulation accuracy results For details on the individual parameters see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt MeasV
112. 39 R amp S9FSW K10 zum D D Ll1li i Ao P a M M acu s R n Qs P M al Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Activating GSM Measurements Application GSM R amp S FSW K10 lt ChannelType gt Parameter GSM Default Channel Name GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise VSA R amp S FSW K70 VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName ChannelName1 lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename String con
113. 5 Norm GMSK TSC O 1 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 41 Demodulation Settings The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection The settings in this dialog box are available when you do the following e Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then switch to the Demodula tion tab R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Demodulation Demodulation S ittings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Synchronization Burst TSC Measure only on Sync 1 Q Correlation Threshold 85 ou Demodulation Symbol Decision Tail amp TSC Bits piece Standard SVMEMVOMIZAUOI MI 98 Measure only Ob Ewe ici re acce e ete te aee tb cu derent ent andae ce tee a ale 99 VQ Correlation Threshold eesis eiieeii ttd Rn ee ER edic cie 99 SYMBOL DOCS ON T 99 NK 100 Synchronization Sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FSW GSM application Burst TSC First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame con fig
114. 54 0 011492 0 001154 Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 16 LSS N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 226 11 6 4 d d Retrieving Results Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Accu racy evaluation For details on the individual results see table 4 1 READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt commands Statistical results For most results both the current result and the statistical evaluation of all results over a number of frames specified by Statistic Count are provided For details on how the statistical evaluation is performed see table 4 2 FETCh iBURSIEMAGGuracy ABE cuire cote ENEE SEENEN 229 READ BURSI MACCuracy ALL eeeeeeeeceense enn ne nannte setenta anhand kankaan inns se sa A EEN 229 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage isses nnne nne 230 FETChBURSI MAGCuracy ADRoop CU RR nt 2 cies ce oe seat ke tes ru eate eu kde De gene aae 230 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum eec einen nnne nin nnt nnn n
115. 57 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 165 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 2 5 11 4 3 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output on page 178 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce eese enne nnne nennen neni nnn ssa nsa sadi asa enneunen 166 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 83 Frontend Configuration The followi
116. 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Demodulation button then switch to the Slot Scope tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot Scope softkey wg Demodulation Settings pe Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Norm V Norm Norm User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 95 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REESEN Demodulation ele ME 96 Number of Slots Depense deele 96 First SIGE to MEAS UG EE 96 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure esee 97 Slot to Measure This parameter specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following rule applies 0 x Slot to Measure x 7 The Slot to Measure is used as the only slot to measure in the following measure ments see First Slot to measure on page 96 Modulation Accuracy EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Modulation Spectrum Constellation Furthermore the Slot to Measure is used to measure the reference power for the fol lowing measurements e Power vs Time e Modulation Spectrum e Transient Spectrum Finally the Slot to Measure is used to measure the position of its TSC which represents the timing reference for th
117. 8 R amp SS9FSW K10 Preface PEEMGNSGNGNEMVCCNC ICD nqer Conventions Used in the Documentation Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks 1 3 2
118. 9 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Resuhts sss 255 e Statws REPOMING eben ease Ehre Eeer Credo d Rar E ena za dad cv reus 256 e Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 262 e Programming Examples xen erret re tr eege edel ge 269 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instrument or software They operate its functions setting Commande or events and request infor mation query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the commands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 132 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Introduction Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Man
119. A UT ETE e A ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUIL User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 16 R amp S FSW K10 5 Magnitude Capture 0 0s Remote command Measurement Results 20 0 ms LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MCAP see s on page 201 Results on page 226 on page 226 on page 221 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error over time for the Slo 3 Magnitude Error 3 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MI el Avg 2 Max e3 Min e4 Clrw 145 5 sym Results ERR see on page 201 on page 221 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 17 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results EMG EMEN CGNC CU D e M I H ne Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 113 Function Function Result d DEE ne 1 Un 1 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 254 Modulation Accuracy Displays the numeric values of the fundamental modulation characteristics of the signal to be analyzed in the vector I Q domain error vector magnitude EVM magnitude and phase error IQ imbalance etc 3 Modulation Accu
120. ACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum 236 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERbRor DEARK GD Viaton nennen 236 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage sse rennen nennen 237 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent essent nennen 237 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum essen nennen 237 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERRor RMG GDEViatton ener 237 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage 1231 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent sessi neret nennen nennen 231 READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum esses nennen nennen nennen 231 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation sess 231 READ BURG MAC CuracvllEVMIRMS AVEhRaoe nennen rennen nennen enne 232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIRMS Cent 232 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum 1232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIRMS GDE Viaton eene nnne 232 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing essent nnne rennen rennen tnn 239 READ SPECtrum MODulation RE Ferencef MMediatel nen 239 READ SPECtr m MODUulationEALIL 1 te restent eren kn Lg Heer eee eee RE ep Ed dese dA 238 READ GbECmum GW ching REterence GATimg ener nennen 249 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence MMediate 249 READ SPECtrum SWITching ALI EE 248 READ SPECtrum WMObDulation GATing obsolete nennen 269 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing sessssssssssssseesses eene nnnen nenne se trit rennen snnt e nnn
121. ALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 210 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 209 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 253 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 254 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not acti vate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 210 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 209 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace determines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is tur
122. AXimum eessessssesesseessseeee enne enne nennen ennne neret rennen 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOOFtset GDEViaetiong A 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbor PEAK AVEHRage nennen enne e nnne 234 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essent enne 234 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum eese nennen rennen nnne 234 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation esses 234 READ BURG MAC Curacvl MERbor RMG AVERage enne rennen nnn ne nentes enne 234 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent essen nennen nnne 234 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum esses nen rennen nre nen 234 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation eese 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvltOSllbporess AVERage natenn 235 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress CURRent esses nee rennen rennen sen 235 READ BURG MAC CuracvltOSllbporess MA Ximum eene enne e nnns nennt nnn 235 READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation 235 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM eese enne nre enne 235 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr esses eene nennen eren nnne 236 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr essen rennen mener 236 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPERRor PEARK AVERagoe nee rennen nre nnenn 236 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent essen nennen nnne 236 READ BURSt M
123. Commands for Compatibility CONFloure BURGCETMet MMedatel nnne 263 CONFloure BURGCMACCuracvt MMediatel er eretororsrnrnnnnnnenene 263 CONFigure BURSEMERRor 1MMediate 1 c Leda t ists ote eee de ee ck Dac eene 263 CONFigure BURSEtPFERror IMMediate ce naeh hat tni dna 263 CONFloure BURG POWerf MMedatel esses a nnne nnne 263 CONFloure BURGCb EMpolatelIMMedatel nrin 263 GONFigure BURSEPTEMplaie SELel 1 2 5 3 nee rra ideo nope RAE TESNE EAA 263 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate eee 263 ele L re ellene E dee tte doute sana aca asit in a eiu enhn acre dine 263 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITchingEIMMediate ce tercie rt rtr niente 264 CONEISure TROSDPIMMediale 2 tte onte aix eye arum ttt Rete Pe ma 264 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IM Mediate eee 264 GONFigure MSEMULETEBURSEUGONSEell 2 2 ote ree pucr reactor RENE ER 264 CONFigureEMS MUETEBURSEDEMoOdulation 1 ecce tti reat 264 CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate esses nennen enne 264 CONFigure MS MULTI SPECtrum MODU Uulation 222 2 22222 araia 264 CONFigure MS I MUE TiSSPECtmm SWITChibg VEER crei ttr rn ete eterne ec Ru dcm ciaae 264 EE Le D ER EIN 264 ICON ar MS MUL VE 264 GONFigureEMS BSEAren RE 264 GONFiSurePMSEBSTHBESShOlG EE 264 QONFigure MSEMIT VIP Ge 1er rdi entree ou p te tanen e
124. Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mA o a aM a a a Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE Manual operation See Automatic Frame Configuration on page 107 CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required level automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that this command cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO LEV ONCE Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 107 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement that determines the trigger offset automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command This can lead to a hang up situation when no trigger signal is available or the trigger level is not set correctly Use a device clear to abort the operation correctly Example CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE Usage Setting only Manual operation See Automatic Trigger Offset on page 108 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Value This command is used to specify the auto track time i e the cap
125. Curacy BPOWer SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Burst Power When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Burst Power see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Burst Power Default unit dB Example READ BURS BPOW SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak result of the Error Vector Magnitude taken over the selected number of bursts When the measurement is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric valu
126. D on page 143 Power Class The following power classes are supported 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 145 Equal Timeslot Length This parameter is only taken into account if Limit Time Alignment is setto Slot to mea sure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 102 If activated all slots of a frame are considered to have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol periods In this case the limit line for each slot required for the Power vs Time spectrum masks is aligned by measuring the TSC of the Slot to Measure only and using this value to align the limit line for all slots in the frame see also PvT Full Burst on page 25 _L_________ UT EE eL LL BA LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU IUUULLISA User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 64 R amp S9FSW K10 Configuration 6 3 2 Signal Description If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all others have a shorter duration compared to the Equal Timeslot Length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 146 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical represe
127. EN 203 Bee E Ee 203 LAY GIU REMoveD WINDOW eio Pac io et dene p ao t ie b eon adv d et ee 203 LAYout REPLace WINDOW iir cerner pete ihe en Bener ue Ree Ra Renee enhn RE 204 LAYOUT EES 204 LAY Gut WINDOWSA ADD iu etie a bet cb eo bana eat aga RR 206 LAYoutWINDow em IDENMtIfy 2 eerte chr khe nennen Rhe nmn aa Renan 206 LAY out WINDowems REMOVE iaceo cenae dover n aate ran dozens tdeo er gebe e innen Ebenen 206 Bee EE 207 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing window RETREAT RE a User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 201 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Analyzing GSM Measurements lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt Ne
128. Figure TRGS NOFBins on page 198 TRACe2 returns the y values for the probability density function PDF of the averaged values The number of values depends on the number of data captures Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 186 X values The results of the TRAC DATA X query also depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parameter TRACe 1 returns the time in s at the center of each bin in the histogram TRACe2 returns the time in s for the PDF function of the averaged values Magnitude Capture Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Magnitude Capture evaluation FETCh MCAPture SbOTSIMEASUIe 5 uc anas enda oer bac ee bao rea aera Recap aaa vd rada 226 FETCH MGAPture SLOTS SGOODS EEN 226 RETE RU RA I UTE E SSS Sa User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 225 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EET UC dr J n Retrieving Results FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure This command queries the positions of the slots to measure in the current capture buffer indicated by blue bars in the result display Return values Result The result is a comma separated list of positions for each slot with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th slot to measure xLen i is the length of the i th slot to measure
129. Frequency This command defines the center frequency If you change the frequency the R amp S FSW updates the ARFCN accordingly _S__SE SS 1 eeLALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLAAAALLLUL A AALLZX User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 167 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Parameters lt Frequency gt Example Usage Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz SCPI confirmed See Center Frequency on page 76 See Center Frequency on page 79 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Example Manual operation fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 79 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Sta
130. GMSK GMSK Pulse TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 User User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 46 R amp SS9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Definition of the Symbol Period 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period The following sections define the symbol period for various modulation types 5 9 1 GMSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The GMSK frequency pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a Gaussian pulse convolved with a rectangular pulse as illustrated at the top of fig ure 5 12 The phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols a is defined in the standard as t iT e t 3 oct gludu Phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 1 where e g t the frequency pulse e T the normal symbol period The modulating index is chosen such that the maximum phase change of 11 2 radians per data interval is achieved Note that the standard specifies The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in GMSK Frequency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom This is also the start of the bit period of bit number O the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The phase change due to the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of GMSK Fre quency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center
131. Gfem PR Ger CHANnell ENECutel tnn nennen enne nnn ennt nnn nennen 141 SYSTem SEQuencer TRACe IQ BWIDI i cnr toten eee e s eas ga ed xh banana bana ERE a Ge EF nada NR D Ra dh 181 TRACE e Ee 222 PRAGCGIO S eq ss c 181 TRAGesn2 DATA X E 221 RRE RE RK 221 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff TRIGger SEQuence DT IMe rtr techn nen trt gne rt ten rh ehh eben apa E gei u dian ry Epor Farb TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOff TIME TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDOff sese nennen EAEE ENAREN RAN EN ENEE NEA TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis essere nnne nre nrsn nenne trennen 174 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPOWSer 521r rtr nnne tna onu nara tratto rho rra a nad erano 175 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IFPower 175 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPOwWer tr reote nne tene nre teat aene heroine ayant bue 176 TRlGoert SGEOuencelL EVelRFbower enne ennt ernst nnns nnne nnne nnns nns 176 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EX emals port nennen nn rennneen nnne 175 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDOff eese nnnm nennen nnen trien e nennen sens 176 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 293 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands BR e EE ele RE Del 177 TRIGger SEQuence SOURCE isis sacs rir t rtr irr Er Per SEE NOELA AE NEAN EErEE ESEN TAY 177 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE esses 197 SENSe FREQuency GENTEr ert eterni rh ner ere d
132. HANnel SLOT2 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC 3 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC TSC 53 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC SET gt 1 Set slot 3 On Normal burst GMSK modulation User defined TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe ON HANnel SLOT3 TYPE NB HANnel SLOT3 MTYPe GMSK HANnel SLOT3 TSC USER HANnel SLOT3 TSC CONFigure MS CONFigure MS CONFigure MS a C OQ CH CONFigure MS gt USER Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Set slot 4 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTA4 STATe OFF Set slot 5 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF Set slot 6 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF Set slot 7 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF p aaa a a a Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 1 Configure slots 0 3 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 4 CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 4 CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence Replace detected Tail amp TSC
133. I MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation assesses 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERRor RMG AVERage 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor RMG CURbent 234 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum cesses 234 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation sisse 234 FETCH BURSIMACCuracy OSUPpress AVERa JE ssnin 235 FETOChBURGOC MAC CuracvlO llboress CURbent eren 235 FETOCh BURG MAC CuracvlOSllbporess MAximum nnne eene 235 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation c esseseeseresereeeceeeeeanaeaeenenees 235 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbDpnress AVEhRage 235 READ BURSIt MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress CURent rennen 235 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EE Retrieving Results READ BURSIt MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum cessisse enne 235 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress GDEVlatlon nent eororsrnsnnenererererennnn 235 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVM a iceciceseese sees ia 235 READ BURG MAC Curacvl PER ene EVM cane eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaaaaaeneees 235 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr cesis nennen 236 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr sess enne renes nnn 236 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr eee sees a arant nein 236 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr essere 236 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor PEAK AVEhRage rennen 2
134. L rfess D LTatoemc ttti 246 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt LIMit FAIL FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage ettet 230 FETCH BURS MACCuract Atpoop CURbeng 230 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum estt ttt ttti 230 FETCH BURS MACCuractAtpoop SDENieton 230 FETCH BURSMACCuractAll 3 229 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage 231 FETCH BURS MACCuract bOWer CUpbRen rnaen 231 FETCH BURS MACCuract bOWer M ximum 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation stt 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor AVERage eet ttti 267 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor CURRent estt ttti 267 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation ettet 267 FETCH BURS MACCuracttREOuenou AvERage ttti 232 FETCH BURS MACCuracttREOuenou CURbent ttt ttti 232 FETCH BURS MACCuracttREOuenorcM ANimum ttes 232 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 288 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuency GDEVlatlon nennen emen 232 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage essen nee rennen nnne 233 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent essen nennen nennen 233 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl IOilMbalance MA Nimum ennemi 233 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation essen 233 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage
135. LD 2us j eesseacase Configuring Data Acquisition Define a capture time of 1 second gt 200 GSM frames SENSe SWEep TIME 1 s Define a statistic count of 200 i e 200 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 200 L a a Configuring the result display Delete result display 3 and 4 and activate the following result displays 1 Magnitude Capture default upper left 2 PvT Full burst default below Mag Capt 3 Modulation Accuracy next to Mag Capt 4 Modulation Spectrum Table next to PvT 5 EVM vs Time measurement full width bottom LAY REM 3 LAY REM 4 LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MACC LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MST LAY ADD WIND 2 BEL ETIMe Signal Description Configure a base station DUT with normal power class 1 CONF DEV TYPE BTSNormal CONF NETW PGSM CONF MS NETW FREQ BAND 900 CONF POW CLAS 1 pf 2 Frame slot configuration CONF CHAN FRAM EQU OFF Set slot 1 On Higher Symbol Rate burst 16QAM Wide Pulse TSC 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE HB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe QAM16 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 FILTer WIDE CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC 0 Set slot 2 On Normal burst GMSK modulation TSC 3 Set 1 Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TYPE NB CONFigure MS C
136. Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q Remote command INPut 1Q TYPE on page 162 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential l Q and inverse I Q data Single Ended l Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 161 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Tip Try this function if the TSC can not be found On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 163 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the m
137. MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 213 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PREMEETAE a p Analyzing GSM Measurements Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters Value numeric value the unit depends on the result display Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Relative Scaling Reference per Division on page 115 See Per Division on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical positio
138. Manual 1173 9263 02 05 105 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Measurement Settings Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Trigger to Sync Histogram i No of Bins Adaptive Data Size No of Bins Specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 Remote command CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 198 Adaptive Data Size Specifies the number of measurements UO captures after which the x axis of the Trig ger to Sync histogram is adapted to the measured values and fixed for subsequent measurements Up to the defined number of measurements the Trigger to Sync value is stored When enough measurements have been performed the x axis is adapted to the value range of the stored results For subsequent measurements the result is no longer stored and the x axis and thus the dimensions of the bins is maintained at the set range The higher the Adaptive Data Size the more precise the x axis scaling For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 Remote command CONFigure TRGS ADPSize on page 198 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 106 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Adjusting Settings Automatically 6 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding
139. Me EQUal lt State gt If activated all slots of a frame have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol periods _L_LL_L LLL N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 146 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 1 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all other a shorter duration compared to the equal slot length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See 3GPP TS 51 0213GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 0103GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details This parameter is used to adjust the time for the Power vs Time masks of all slots The Slot to measure is used as the time reference for the entire frame Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CHAN FRAM EQU OFF Manual operation See Equal Timeslot Length on page 64 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Slot The R amp S FSW GSM application is slot based Thus information on the expected slots of the input signal are required The following commands are required to provide this information CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer esses 147 CONFioureM lcH AkNnel SL OTcNumberztSTaTel enn 148 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number MTYPe sse nennen 148 CONFigure MS CHANne
140. N 255 OUTP ut TRIGgersport DO erte orit ptt ree peret besten ta eventu erheben ua resa br reu SERA 178 OUTPut TRIGg r port EEWVel 5 2 aeree st erc Tec tee eddy eder de feda 178 OUTPut TRIGE porn OW VPC EE 179 OUTPutCTRlGoer portz PU ZelMMedlate A 179 OUTPut TRIGger port PUESe EENGth iiri epe inthis natae dep ace tid ede eee aco 180 READ AU TOsLEV Times cds cccca eed 268 READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERa JE AA 250 READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent 250 READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum sess nne nnne trennen ennt ens 250 READ BURG PTEMpolate TRGG MiNilmum nennen nennen nennen ener 251 READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation 0 0 0 cecceeceeceseeeeceseeeeeeereeeeeeecaeseaeseeseaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeenteseeatenas 251 READ BURG GbOMWer SL OT ZGlot ALL AVERage 240 READ BURG GbOVWer GL OT ZGlot ALL CRESI 241 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum 242 READ BURG GbOMWer GL OT ZGlot CURRent AVERage 243 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent CREG essen nennen 244 READ BURG GbOVWer GL OT ZGlot CURbRent MA vimum nennen 245 READ BURG GbOVWer GL OT Got DEL Tatoevnc 246 READ BURG GbOVWer GL OT Glo LUIMCEAIL 3 247 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage 230 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent essent nnne nns 230 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum sess nre ennt tnn nnne 230 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation
141. O ERR 115 B dE c NNNM 115 E RI TEE 115 Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO on page 213 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum on page 213 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MINimum on page 213 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per division Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision on page 169 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 214 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Divis
142. OT s ALE MAXimuIm ceret Ido cerne chalet ee hae 242 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSIot ALL MAXimum eese nennen 242 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent AVERage sss 243 READ BURG GbOwWer GL OT Glotz CUbRbent AVChRage nn 243 FETCHh BURSESPOWer GLOTss s CURRent ORES iced tease ete dao RE e 244 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSIot CURRent CRESIt eese nenne 244 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT s CURRent MAXimum eeesessssssssesee nennen 245 READ BURG GbOwWer GL OT Glotz CUbRbentMANimum 245 FETCh BURSESPOWerSLOT s DEL Tatosync luca conecte denen ehe nnne nnne 246 READ BURSESPOWsESEOTSSIDE DELTaltoSyne rate uncta euh saa totque 246 FETCh BURSESPOWerSPEOTSsT le TEE 247 READ BURSESPOWerSLOTeSloE EIMIBPAIE aote cun noie o pto con Ret dE 247 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL AVERage This command starts the measurement and reads out the average power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measu
143. P TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation with a higher symbol rate which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the physical link They use a higher symbol rate 325 ksymb s but have bit rates of 2 x 325 kbit s 4 x 325 kbit s or 5 x 325 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 5 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The figure below shows the modulation spectrum for both GMSK and 8PSK T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 35 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Short Introduction to VAMOS Modulation Spectrum 800 700 op om em om 200 0 o mm 20 mm am 50 en om w Frequency Offset MHz Fig 5 2 GMSK and 8PSK modulation spectrum Increasing the bandwidth multiple slots GPRS HSCSD The customers demand for higher telecommunication speeds increases the demand for bandwidth Therefore the GSM standard has to evolve constantly An example of this development is the introduction of the EDGE EDGE Evolution specification and the GPRS EGPRS2 and HSCSD modes Until now each mobile could use only one slot per frame but the new HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data and GPRS General Packet Radio Service methods will allow permanent assignment of more than one slot per mobile plus dynamic utilization of multiple slots The concept behind GPRS is dynamic assignment of up to 8 slots to each mobile for data transmission depending on dema
144. PvT Full Burst Trace Results The Power vs Time results depend on the number of slots that are measured and thus the duration of the measurement 30 additional symbols NSP are added at the beginning and at the end of the trace User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 224 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 6 2 3 11 6 2 4 11 6 2 5 11 6 3 Retrieving Results The number of trace result values is calculated as 30 lt NofSlots gt 157 30 ov where NofSlots Number of Slots Slot Scope ov oversampling factor 24 157 length of a long slot a slot can have a length of 156 156 25 or 157 symbols NSP Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graphs consist of 1135 trace values two less than in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers Magnitude Capture Results The Magnitude Capture trace consists of 32001 trace values regardless of the defined capture time and thus of the length of the capture buffer To retrieve the complete captured UO data use the MMEM STOR IQ STAT command see MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 255 Trigger to Sync Results The Trigger to Sync Graph results consist of two traces Thus the results of the TRAC DATA query depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parameter TRACe 1 returns the height of the histogram bins the number of values is defined by the number of bins see CON
145. PvT filter m 102 AUtO Lese edd 81 Single PVT filter eene 101 Configuration remote sese 171 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 295 R amp S FSW K10 Index Center frequency E 79 Analog Baseband GB 76 SIEP S ZE m EE 79 Channel bandwidth MSRA ue Channel numbers ET GSM standard ciiisean ia c C HI Constellation Evaluation method seseeeeeee 15 Continue single sweep Nel H H NEN 94 Continuous sweep SOfIKOV esinaine e eei t E 93 Conventions SCPI commands n retirees 133 Copying Measurement channel remote 138 Coupling Input remote arreter ete 156 D Data acquisition essssssseseneee 90 91 lp EE 92 180 Data format jc 220 Default values ipe eg 59 Delta markers Doe 112 elteren geet eg 102 Delta to Sync rego nnd 53 RU cc 24 Demodulation ore miferi EE 97 tup d E 94 Device type D DIC m 60 Diagram footer information sees 13 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 161 Analog Baseband DG 76 Dig Input Sample Rate Digital IG x eere n rere rentre XP ivre 73 DiglConf Softkey see
146. R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Status Reporting System Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other channel name as a query parameter Table 11 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 BURSt not found This bit is set if no burst is found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time SYNC not found This bit is set if the synchronization sequence or training sequence of the TSC is not found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time 2 to 14 These bits are not used This bit is always 0 11 8 2 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output This register is available with option Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Digital Base band Inte rface R amp S FSW B17 The status of the STAT
147. R amp SSFSW K10 GSM Measurement User Manual Odam 20 gp Ze e q ARF N aptus P Current 0 13 0 43 1173 9263 02 05 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 1 70 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S9FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K10 1313 1368 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp SS9FSW K10 Contents Contents o c
148. RA applications and the MSRA Master LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 215 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements aa a I R J JA O A s Analyzing GSM Measurements Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters Position Position ofthe analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not th
149. Ratio SCPIR of the specified slot Notes This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR in dB Range 15 to 15 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Manual operation See SCPIR on page 67 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 273 _LL_L L L_ N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 149 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EMEN R Mi Pa Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER Value This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be 26 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER must be set first This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt string String containing the 26 user defined bits Example Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell1
150. Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 164 6 4 2 Frequency Settings Frequency settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Frontend Settings dialog box User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 77 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Freguency Band p es 78 Center E ET 79 AR FOP nm T9 Center Frequency Gtepnslze 79 See acce ned EID EMO a DTE E Ede EDD da 79 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 33 The following frequency bands are supported T GSM 380 T GSM 410 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 T GSM 810 GSM 850 P GSM 900 E GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 144 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 143 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 78 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 4 3 Input and Frontend Settings Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly see ARFCN Th
151. SM Measurements Retrieving Results Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace number TRACe1 Average trace Transient Spectrum Maximum trace Trigger to Sync histogram values TRACe2 Maximum trace Trigger to Sync PDF of average trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRACe2 DATA X Returns the Power vs Time values for the active trace in window 2 TRACe3 DATA X TRACe1 Returns the Trigger to Sync values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See PvT Full Burst on page 25 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the 1 Q data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FSW By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SRATe on page 181 and SENSe SWEep TIME on page 181 Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in relation to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples you want to query beginning at the o
152. SPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL com mand see LAYout SPLitter on page 204 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 200 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 5 1 2 Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measurement channel ox do eelere 201 LAY OURCA Talog WINDONJISP 522 2 222a aaa lee SR A
153. Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 183 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA appli cations The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 216 Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 94 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration DREES Demodulation The Demodulation settings are available from the configuration Overview The Frame and Slot settings are identical to those in the Signal Description dialog box see chapter 6 3 1 Frame and DUT Settings on page 63 and chapter 6 3 2 Slot Settings on page 65 Slo SCOPE DT 95 e D imodulaton SOUNGS et ees eege dE a eed ee ieee 97 6 7 1 Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5
154. T1 TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel 1 TSC O Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell1 TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC TSC gt 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC SET Programming Examples gt 1 Subchannel 2 TSC O Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC TSC gt 0 Subchannel 2 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC SET ff 9 2 de Se Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTA4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF L aa a Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 0 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL MEASure 0 Configure slots 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient
155. TA i einer Hte ter BE rer hr npn rt EPIRI NI 220 lee t 183 INIMA CONTINUOUS soos rtt rtp save ter ert eR rH ERI ERR Ee er EY edP Ger RD ER ra E eee 183 Ie MEI TEE 184 INI Tiate REER SD eege eieiei eelere hrs OD CEPR PETERE CEP 216 NEE ele 185 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediale 5 neon preset petet ero eer dc ie Bret enfe er edenda 185 INITiate SEQuencer MODE esssessessessseseessseee eterne einen enin tnnt a aea aada aa i aeea ia sein aa 185 IMEEM CIEN RR 184 ll IN RE le 171 INPut AT Tenuation AU NK e DEE 172 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESOt uiii dedere de caede arii arda etes Fa iie bed o dau 156 INPut COUPling ll Sg alle Ver RTE 158 INPut DIG RANGe COUPling ioa ce rie eeu do Se oa nr rao se oen aas bre one E eausa no cae e er rn Xe randa 160 elef ie NEE E 160 INbPutDlORANGet Uppert AUTO 159 INPutiDIG RANGeE UPPer UNIT eoe rd rrr trn Here Pr even Ye rte ris EF eR rS REFER ERR ERE ERI 160 INPut DIQ SRATe INPUEDIQ SRATGAUTO EE 161 ljudzgumeE M 172 ly zit s MUI Or P 172 ly zispe AN S RPL I E 172 INPutFILTerHPASs STAT 6 EE ECRR 156 INPut FlLTer YIG STATe INPUti GAIN iS TA wc INPUEGAINDVALUS E INPUGIMPOd ane e
156. TCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Frequency Error see table 4 1 RETE RU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 232 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mE cU c C H H Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FREQ SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy IQIMbalance CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the resu
157. TEMplate TRGS MINimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 250 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements AEG UU X H TC A OCCKAe K e Retrieving Results READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation This command starts a Trigger to Sync measurement and reads out the time between the external trigger event and the middle of the TSC of the Slot to Measure This command is only available if an external trigger is selected and the Trigger to Sync measurement is active see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 and Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 Return values Result numeric value Trigger to Sync time Default unit S Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set external trigger mode TRIGgerl SEQuence SOURce EXTernal Set minimum capture time to speed up measurement SENSel SWEep TIME MINimum JI Auto set trigger offset II Note Correct frame slot configuration assumed CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE II Activate Trigger to Sync measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT TGSG LAY ADD 1 BEL TGST Query stan
158. TRansitton eene nennen nnne nennen nnt nnn inneren sena 259 STATusOUlEG onable DiO P Ransiton AE 259 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt 259 STAT us QUEStionable DIO EVENIJ 5 teorema unn Era EE ere Eva ea eR nes e EE Pe FRE Pod 261 STATus QUEStionable ENABle vicia ee rne oir eterne erre YR ask ean oe br o eo ERN Fun eoa ee O Onana 261 STATusOUEG onable L Mitcnz CGONDitton eterne nennen nennen eene nennen 261 STATusOUEG onable LU lMitnzENAbBle eene nennen tnnt nne tenerent enne nre nnns 261 STATusOUEGtonablellMitznzNiRansiton eene nnnm en eren n nnne nnn 262 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition STATusOUEG onable L MitznzfTEVENUN inne nnne nnns ian 261 STATusOUEGtonableNTRansitton nennen nennen nnne rent net r nnn r ener ntn nnn 262 STAT s QUEStionable P TRatsitilOn circ rotae eite etatis canere Feu rene eua co YER TERESE EVENE 262 STATus QUEStionable SYNC GONDIILOn t eoo ees carre tae rra e Pena ye XY EEE ETE Y eT P a CY e Fe FERE OIRR 261 STATusOUEG onable GNCENADile eterne neret e iea enne nns inns senten nnns STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition sees n nnns nennt nennt STATusOUEGtonable GVNCTEVMENU enne eene ERESHE EN EE nnns EENEN EN EE rE inns 261 STATus QUEStionable FEVENU edd Pu ida aa Pea e ERN YR SEENEN d 260 STAT s QUEUe NEXT geg reena esr aa e a aa a r ve teen e gear poete re rea ER nn a ee ue V a 260 Sv
159. TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel1 TSC gt USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 68 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 273 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC Value This command selects the training sequence of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2213 11 3 214 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 USER TSC number and Set or User TSC Set 2 is only available for subchannel 2 RST 0 1 ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 150 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PREMETAE Q U IU P Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 JI Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC I gt 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBC
160. TYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 MTYPe PSK8 Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe I1 gt GMSK Please use the following K10 commands instead CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure gt 0 This is the slot number of the slot to measure JI Set and query the modulation of the slot to measure CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 MTYPe gt GMSK GSM User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 265 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM CN I H J r I aa PUR Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE This command is used to perform an auto level measurement immediately Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 199 for new remote control programs CONFigure MS SSEarch State This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only In new K10 remote scripts use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE TSC or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 189 Parameters for setting a
161. Te on page 156 Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box E a User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 72 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Input Input Source Power Sensor Radio Frequency op Input Setting Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Adjust Reference Level G We e IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital VQ remus E TET 73 Input Sample Sale er tree Rer E Rer RH a atn en MR E E e ba Reda ee ar RR 73 Pall Seale Mu EE 73 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 74 Connected MET E EE 74 ode Mm 74 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 157 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is fr
162. This command queries the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Parameters lt SampleRate gt The sample rate is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 104 Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See Sample rate on page 91 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 181 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 5 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sampling rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 91 Configuring and Performing Sweeps The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe SWEep TIME on page 181 e INITiate REFResh on page 216 Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performing sweeps JS Eque Me EE TH HEP 182 INITIATE CONE EI R 183 Me ET CONTINUOUS RECEPTORS 183 INTAS Play e 184 INI Tate RIMMediate EH 184 INITIate SEQuencer e EE 185 INITlate GEOuencer IMMediate 185 INI TIate SEOu
163. Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Average Default unit dBm User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 243 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt This command starts the measurement to read out the crest factor for the selected sl
164. Uencer MODE E 185 SENS BURSCCOUN snc E 186 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce tet te enttenettteetetttt tet tete ttt te stt D 186 SENSe JS eeler EE 187 SENSe SWEep COUNECTRGS CURRent r enan itched ede teen ee thay ee eeng 187 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 185 command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement ERREUR RU SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 182 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and p
165. Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommen ded for high symbol to noise ratios but not for higher symbol rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse filter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 16 may occur if the Linear symbol decision algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 99 R amp S9FSW K10 Configuration 6 8 6 8 1 Measurement Settings Sequence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algo rithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better per formance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measurement speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod DECision on page 190 Tail amp TSC Bits The demodulator in the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the burst tail data TSC data tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The data bits can be ra
166. WMOD GAT Mode GSM 11 10 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to configure and perform GSM measurements in a remote environment e Programming Example Determining the EVNM sss 269 e Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal sss 273 e Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts 276 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM This example demonstrates how to configure an EVM measurement in a remote envi ronment Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt EE Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM EEUU RU UU SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 269 Programming Examples Trigger settings Use these settings only if an external trigger is connected to the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW Otherwise ignore these commands Define the use of an external trigger TRIG SOUR EXT Determine the offset from the trigger event to the frame start start of active part of slot 0 Define a trigger offset of 2 us TRIG HO
167. a IEC bus The GSM application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the following sec tions For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual o RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers All the status registers are the same as those provided by the base system with the exception of the following registers which are provided by the R amp S FSW and are not available from the R amp S FSW GSM application command tree e STATus QUESTionable ACPLimit e STATus QUESTionable LIMit2 e STATus QUESTionable LMARgin lt 1 2 gt The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 8 3 Querying the Status Registers on page 260 e The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register eese 256 e STATUs QUEStonable DIO Fieglster 2 reticere cert eser eines 257 e Querying the Status HReoisters EEN 260 11 8 1 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 256
168. a number of measurements have taken place This is done using the adaptive data size setting see Adaptive Data Size on page 106 This setting defines how many measurements are performed before the x axis is adapted to the measured values and then fixed to that range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGSG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 DISPlay WINDow TRACe1 MODE WRITe for Histogram see bD1SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 DISPlay WINDow TRACe2 MODE PDFavg for PDF of average see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 221 Trigger to Sync Table The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the middle of the TSC of the Slot to Measure Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 93 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 the numeric results provide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation 2 Trigger to Sync Table Current Average i Std Dev Trigger to Sync us 225 30005 225 30006 225 29788 225 3012 0 00042 Fig 4 2 Trigge
169. able evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCA SPECON SWITENNO ALLP aae etri tae uae adn renda Re reda d nare mau iE 248 READ SPECtrmum SWITCHING ALU EE 248 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence esses a 249 READ SPECtrum SWITching RFerencet MMedatel esses 249 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing e ene intet eee a usen Ra ieee 249 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the transient spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant Freq1 Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the o
170. able register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 258 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM CIC JYA r n nn H T g Status Reporting System Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register
171. acy measurement see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 The Slot to Measure is required for the following reasons e To provide the reference power and time reference for the Power vs Time mea surement see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Typically the masks for all slots are time aligned according to the timing of the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 102 e All Modulation Spectrum results are based on the Slot to Measure see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 The results of all Transient Spectrum diagrams are based on the slot scope i e on the interval defined by the First Slot to measure and the Number of Slots to measure see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 e All results that require demodulation of one slot and statistical analysis e g Modu lation Accuracy Phase Error and EVM are based on the Slot to Measure The slot scope is defined in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 and it is indicated by a filled green box in the Frame Configura tion see figure 5 6 The Slot to Measure is indicated by a filled blue box EEEETETIUTUR RA UT ETE e 1 1 1 1 1 LLL LL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLX User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 40 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar In the channel bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application as well as in th
172. ad see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 189 Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF ON Burst search on OFF Burst search off RST 1 CONFigure MS BSTHreshold lt Value gt This command changes the burst find threshold Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Due to the improved measurement capabilities of this GSM analysis software this remote control command and the function behind is not required any more IECH User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 264 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt Example Mode numeric value Threshold for burst detection Default unit dB CONF BSTH 10 DB GSM CONFigure MS MTYPe lt Value gt This command sets the modulation type of all slots Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt Example Mode GMSK EDGE Modulation type RST GMSK Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS MTYPe EDGE Please use the following K10 commands instead I K5 GMSK gt K10 GMSK I K5 EDGE gt K10 PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 M
173. age 64 so the limit line is aligned to the slots correctly For non standard signals or if you require more precise delta values use the Time Alignment Per Slot setting Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed in the status bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application Check these descriptions for possible error causes and solutions Burst not fold ier err nne Syne not foundg eei eec Burst not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 68 Slot is not in defined slot scope Include the slot in the slots to measure see chap ter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 Sync not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 68 Noor incorrect position of access burst in slot defined Define the correct Timing Advance for the slots con taining an access burst see Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 68 The trigger event does not correspond to the start of the active part in slot 0 Correct the trigger offset for an external trigger see Trigger Offset on page 88 The DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal Swap the
174. also R amp S DiglConf 74 Digital Baseband Interface B17 Inputsettirigs orte rrr D erre Input status remote ie Status registers a orte tnmen Digital UO Input connection information sess 74 le ue EE 72 Digital input Connection information sese 74 Digital standards Frequenties 34 Relevant for GSM sde etegegeeuergersgkiedeger eegend 32 Display Configuration kin m DL Downlink petet m Drop out time EIS 88 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 138 DUT Configuration seeesssseeeen 63 130 E EI LEE 279 EDGE Evolution erret re ter herpeese 32 35 EGPRS EGPRS23 c netos ict eret Nn Electronic input attenuation sessessssse Enable Left Limit Right Limit Equal Timeslot Length seeeseeseeees Errors CAUSES si 131 Device connections B17 sesse eee eee eee 257 ee ED nece decas suus ee 81 Magnitude result display DE ke Modulation result display sesseesssese 18 efc M P Status bar Se batter DIS eege rrr rhe rrr Eege Evaluation methods IReITiolB coss erit reor eene a ve reu rudes dederas 201 Der m 223 EVM Evaluation method rre 16 Mu ltiple C tTiers oerte ree ene 130 Results remote eerte REES eeh
175. alue gt lt Error Vector Magnitude RMS gt lt Error Vector Magnitude Peak gt lt Magnitude Error RMS gt lt Magnitude Error Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt Phase Error Peak gt Origin Offset Suppression gt IQ Offset gt IQ Imbalance gt lt Frequency Error Burst Power Amplitude Droop gt lt 95 ile EVM gt lt 95 ile Mag Error gt lt 95 ile Phase Error The results are output as a list of comma separated strings For each result except for iles the Current Average Maximum and Standard Deviation values are returned User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 229 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements RAREMENT T PJ Retrieving Results Example READ BURS ALL 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 0 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 0 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 0 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 0 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 0 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 0 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 0 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844
176. alyzing GSM Measurements 11 5 2 3 Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ssssssssssseseenenee nennen 213 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum sees 213 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MINimum ceres nennen 213 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision eese 214 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition eese 214 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACevtSCALelbRVAl ue enne nennen nen 214 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum esee 215 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum eeeeeeeeee n 215 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Parameters for setting and query State OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y
177. are is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again EEUU RU EEUU ETE 8 LLX E IIULELLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLALALAALLLUL A AUAUULXSI J User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 74 R amp S9FSW K10 Configuration 6 4 1 3 Input and Frontend Settings Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the
178. ase stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 126 R amp S FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is trans mitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodu lated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum measurements e For multicarrier base stations define which carriers are measured the left most carrier only Enable Left Limit ON the right most carrier only Enable Right Limit ON all carriers Enable Left Limit ON Enable Right Limit ON e Sele
179. ass gt This command defines the base station class The specified BTS Class effects the cal culation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum mea surement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise and chapter 4 3 2 Base Transceiver Station search for Multicarrier BTS Parameters for setting and query lt BTSClass gt Range 1 to 2 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example CONF MCAR BTSClass Manual operation See BTS Class on page 70 CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs lt MultiCarrierBTS gt This parameter informs the R amp S FSW K10 that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal This function is only available if the Device Type is a BTS type see CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 142 If active a special multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path and further multicarrier specific parameters become available Parameters for setting and query lt MultiCarrierBTS gt ON OFF RST OFF E a User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 154 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 2 11 4 2 1 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example CONF MCAR MCBT ON Manual operation See Multicarrier BTS on page 69 CONFigure MS MCARrier STATe State This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only In new R amp S FSW K10 remote scripts use the commands described in
180. asurements Analyzing GSM Measurements Note even if a trace is not displayed the results can still be queried see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode For a description of the trace modes see the Trace Mode Overview section in the base unit manual Parameters Mode Example Manual operation AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures BLANk Hides the selected trace MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one PDFavg The probability density function PDF of the average value WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Modulation spectrum graph measurement LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH
181. at in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote con trol commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the software func tions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are described here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on maintenance instru ment interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the application are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not included in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05
182. ation Offset Reference level offset if available Freq ARFCN Center frequency for the GSM signal Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number if available Device Band Device type and frequency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 12 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application 5 a ee Understanding the Display Information Slot Scope Minimized visualization of the frame configuration and slots to be measured see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Number of frames already evaluated Total number of frames required for statistical evaluation Statistic Count For Statistic Count gt 1 TRG Trigger source if not Free Run and used trigger bandwidth for IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g trigger settings This information is displayed only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 2 Magnitude Capture 1 Clrw SANS Fig 2 1 Window title bar informatio
183. aximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 167 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config _ _ ___L_L___ M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 76 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 x Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detected type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each con nected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Microbunon Be ET 77 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton
184. ay to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 127 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 13 Check the result of the limit check in the graph If it indicates FAIL refer to the numeric results in the table display for more precise information on which frequency exceeds the limit indicated by a negative A to Limit value and red characters R amp S FSW K10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Improving Performance 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results of a GSM measurement do not meet your expectations try the following recommendations to optimize the measurement e improving PONONMANCO 2 ageet er ee ei Eo dator gecesi andata 129 e Improving EVM ACcuracN nennen nennen enn nennen enn nennen nennen 129 e Optimizing Limit edel Eed den Dd banner dez x tasa n Dt et 130 LER E lg MESSAGES ERR 131 10 1 Improving Performance If the GSM measurement seems to take a long time try the following tips Using external triggers to mark the frame start The R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time reference It either searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition or relies on a trigger event that marks the frame start An external trigger
185. between the trigger event and the start of the sweep ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 88 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration mE c M SHMHGC G ass Trigger Settings Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 39 The R amp S FSW GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot 0 offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 174 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 177 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 174 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig
186. bits at a time a scrollbar beneath the table allows you to display the remaining bits The currently selected bit number is indicated in the center of the scrollbar Table 6 3 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 68 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration mam GC A mm m mE RM ULM NNUS Signal Description Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access GMSK 41 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER on page 152 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER on page 150 6 3 3 Multicarrier Settings The Multicarrier settings are only required for signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers They are available from the Signal Description dialog box which is displayed when you select the corresponding button in the configuration Overview Frame Slot Multi Carrier Multi Carrier BTS Multi Carrier BTS No of Active Carriers BTS Class Multicarrier BTS This parameter informs the R amp S FSW GSM application that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal This function i
187. cce 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage essen 232 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVMJ RMS CURRent sss nnne 232 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum eese 232 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvltEVMIRMS GDEViaton nen 232 Retrieving Results READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage sse nere 232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIRMGCURbent nennen 232 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAX MUM ener nennen 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation esses 232 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage sss neret 232 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURREN1 cccececcsecenectesneedenereneceeeaeaeenenens 232 FETOChBURGOCMACCuracvlFREOuencv M ANlmum eene rne 232 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation sss 232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuencv AVEHRage eene nennen rennen 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent essent ener 232 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum cesses eene 232 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuencv GDEViaton eese 232 FETOCh BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance AVERage nennen 233 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent esses 233 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum sess ener 233 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance GDtEViaton 233 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage sss eene 233 READ BURSIt MACC
188. ccur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 REA RU EUER SSS 552 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 141 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Deeg Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 4 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements The following commands are required to configure a GSM measurement on an R amp S FSW in a remote environment e Signal DESCON ranures a e ei 142 InpuyOutpub SENGS EE 155 M Frontend eege T 166 e Triggering Measurements cscceeacceececeeeeecece eroe metr cenam aene n anth nean 173 e Data Acquisition sde REESEN Edel EES 180 MERI DL eC 187 e Measure MEN EE 192 e Adjusting KE le Een Le EE 198 11 4 1 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimizes frame detecti
189. ce is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SENSe BURSt COUNt Count SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt These commands define the number of measurements the R amp S FSW uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep measurements the R amp S FSW calculates the moving aver age over the Statistic Count In case of single sweep measurements the R amp S FSW stops the measurement and cal culates the average after Statistic Count measurements Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single measurement Range 0 to 200000 RST 200 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a series of 64 measurements and waits till its end eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 186 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 6 0 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 93 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of frames or measurements used for statistical evaluation It
190. channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index I 0 0 Q 0 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 LLL 01 QILIIO Channel 1 Complex sample 0 I 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 I 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 I 1 1 Q 1 1 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 TE2 Lf Of27 a Channel 2 Complex sample 1 I 2 Q 0 2 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 ELL EST ET EST Channel 1 Complex sample 2 I 21 2 QI21 21 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This is an example of how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MAT LABS Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid R amp SS9FSW K10 List of Commands List of Commands ABORT PR atic siamcees oa 182 CAL Culate MSRACALING S HOW in ether etec redeas BERNA 215 CALCulate MSRACALING VALuUe irte netz Ene teta ege 216 CAL Culate MSbRAWINDow cnz NA 216 CAL Culatesn DELETamarker AOEFF reni diee Hee Eee odio Bp tds EE rep daa dua deed de 209 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum APEaKk
191. complex baseband signals i e a signal rep resentation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the Uu Q baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in exter nal software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to analyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then perform a GSM measurement on that data later using the R amp S FSW GSM application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values l Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A 2 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 280 e lnhpormt EXport PUNCUONS vc ccvenccdccedessaccesindtnnanad concvnnncesceaddeandehcaseennssedqusada
192. configuration in Slot Scope settings This graphic can be interpreted as follows e Each slot is represented by its number 0 to 7 e Slot numbers within the defined slot scope are highlighted green e The number of the defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue e Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols above the number which contain the following information The burst type e g Norm for a normal burst The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set or Sync for access bursts Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application The R amp S FSW GSM application requires a number of filters for different stages of signal processing These include the Multicarrier filter for multicarrier base station measure ments only the Power vs Time filter and the Measurement filter A signal flow diagram is shown in figure 5 7 to illustrate where the different filters are used User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 42 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application Synchronization VQ Capture Buffer Measurement Filter Modulation Spectrum Measurements Fig 5 7 Signal flow diagram highlighting filtering operations 5 7 1 Multicarrier Filter The Multicarrier filter is only applied to the captured data if the Multicarrier BTS option is selected see Multicarrier BTS on page 69 This filter is used to suppress neigh boring channels which may disturb measure
193. ct the type of resolution filter to be used For measurements strictly according to standard use the Normal 3dB filter e Select the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spectrum For a quick overview select a sparse list for a conformance test use the list specified by the standard As a rule use the narrow list to test mobile devices use the wide list for base station tests e Select the reference power to be used to determine the relative limit values for the transient spectrum For measurements strictly according to standard use the RMS setting 10 Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for spectrum results up to a total of 16 windows e Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 e Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 e Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 e Transient Spectrum Table on page 28 Tips e Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data e Use the graph displays for a general overview of the currently measured spec trum the tables provide detailed numeric values and an accurate conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard e The modulation spectrum shows the spectrum for a portion of a burst in a single slot see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 the transient spectrum shows the spectrum for all slots in the slot scope including the rising and falling edges of the bursts Arrange the windows on the displ
194. cted Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot 0 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number to mea sure Equal 0 156 25 312 50 468 75 625 00 781 25 937 50 1093 75 Timeslot Length On Equal 0 157 313 469 625 782 938 1094 Timeslot Length Off Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum The determined Modulation Spectrum values in the average Avg trace can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Modulation Spectrum diagram see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if either limit is exceeded The limits depend on the following parameters e Frequency band e Device Type only BTS type not MS type e Burst Type Modulation Filter limits are different for Higher Symbol Rate and Wide Pulse Filter case 2 and others case 1 see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 3 e The measured reference power 30 kHz bandwidth e The measured burst power level e Number of active carriers for multicarrier BTS see No of active Carriers on page 70 The limit is relaxed by 10 log10 N dB for offset frequencies 21 8 MHz see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 2 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum The determined Transient Spectrum Accuracy values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit
195. d controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 261 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mA UU I H Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 8 3 5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt BitDefinit
196. d schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFactor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 283 R amp S9FSW K10 Annex Reference A 2 2 UO Data File Format iq tar ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 67 float float 69 float float
197. dard deviation of trigger to sync time II Note READ starts a new single sweep and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURS PTEM TRGS SDEV I I I I Usage Query only 11 6 9 Limit Check Results The following command is required to query the results of a limit check for a specific result display Useful commands for retrieving limit check results described elsewhere e READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL on page 247 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving limit check results GALGulateem EIMiESICS EAIES iiic aate tte neret net tuendi metet ettet 252 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 251 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of the limit check of the limit line indicated in the selected measurement window Note that a complete sweep must have been performed to obtain a valid result A synchronization with OPC OPC Or WAI should therefore be provi ded Suffix lt k gt Return values lt Result gt Example Usage Manual operation 1 2 The number of the limit line to access Power vs Time Graph only 1 Max trace gt upper limit line 2 Min trace gt lower limit line 1 0 1 Failed see table 11 6 0 Passed see table 11 6 CALCulate2 LIMit1 FAIL Quer
198. data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other formats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 220 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements b n H ae Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA lt TraceNumber gt This command reads trace data out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt This com mand is only available for graphical result displays The returned values are scaled in the current le
199. de the displayed mea surement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels see the data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stability can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 175 TRIGger S LEVel IQPower on page 176 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 175 TRIGger S LEVel RFPower on page 176 EQuence EQuence Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 174 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset
200. defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Offsets Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL on page 248 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate on page 249 Trigger to Sync Graph The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the middle of the TSC of the Slot to Measure Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 93 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings the numeric results provide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation see Trigger to Sync Table on page 30 1 Trigger to Sync Graph 225 297 us ETT 225 301 us Fig 4 1 Trigger to Sync Graph EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 29 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results EMG NEM CONI
201. dert pr HE Ee ge Eeer od 142 CONFiourel M StMCAbrter AC TCarriers AA 154 CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass CONFiourel MSINE Work FEREOuencv BAND 143 CONFigure MSENETWOrk TYPE iiec eot ret ente testet retos enses ee uoa neni See 144 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE AAA 266 CONFiourel M bOWer AUTO SuWEepn TIME 199 CONFigure MSTEPOWSr CLASS iiit rie crt ra eL egre ea y n ATH TM Aelia eee ER CH YE RUE YE G lle HE RO ET en BEE CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold CONFiourel MSlSNCMODE tnt ut tnt Ent AtEAtANEANENEAAENEANEAEESEANENEENEE EEA ENEEA EEEn EEEa Enen nt GONFig re MSTSYNG ONLY 5 52 tpe Edere etn Ert eec dees A E Ede SE E eH Y c DlACpnostie SERViceN sOurce DISPIay FORMAaL enata t n opi a gd v de eue dg use doe dee Ee e Da DISPIay MEABIGS cnet evo MM DMIKEM IUE LIE A ERREUR UU EE 8 e e 1 LL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLLULXI User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 287 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands DISPlayWINDow n SIZE ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt DiSblautWiNDowensTRACextzcChLel natr ranannnnaa DiSblautWINDowensTRACeytSCALe M ximum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACEe Y SCALE MINIMUM ttt DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision eet DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision cett DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel ttt DISPlayWINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet
202. device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is trans mitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Selectthe Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodu lated E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 122 R amp S FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 2 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum Trigger to Sync and Power vs Time measurements In particular define the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spec trum and filters to be used for multicarrier measurements 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12 Select the Result Config button to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the
203. domain mainly used to distinguish between different users as well as in the frequency domain mainly used to distinguish between BTS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 32 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Slots and frames The time domain is divided into slots with a duration of 576 923 us exactly 3 5200 s 8 slots numbered 0 to 7 are combined into 1 frame with a duration of approximately 4 6154 ms exactly 3 650 s Multiframes and superframes Frames can be grouped into a multiframe consisting of either 26 for support traffic and associated control channels or 51 for all other purposes frames Multiframes can be grouped to superframes consisting of either 51 26 frame or 26 51 frame multiframes Multiframes and superframes are not of relevance for the physical measurements on the GSM system and thus not discussed in detail here A mobile phone therefore does not communicate continuously with the base station instead it communicates discretely in individual slots assigned by the base station during connection and call establishment In the simplest case 8 mobiles share the 8 slots of a frame TDMA Frequency bands and channels The frequency range assigned to GSM is divided into frequency bands and each band in turn is subdivided into channels Each frequency channel is identified by its center frequency and a number known as the ARFON Absolute
204. e EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PEAK AVER EET RU UT SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 231 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements RNEMERCEE gn Retrieving Results Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Error Vector Magnitude When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS RMS SDEV Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage FE
205. e PERRor RMS Resul 2 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all us P SS Phase Error results for all frames in entire measurement READ BURSt fall MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor Origin Origin offset suppression for the demodulated signal in READ BURSt MACCuracy Offset the Slot to Measure Indicates the suppression of the DC OSUPpress Resulttype Sup carrier the higher the suppression the better the DUT pression dB UO Off I Q offset for the demodulated signal in the Slot to Mea READ BURSt MACCuracy set sure IQOFfset Resulttype Ka UO A measure for gain imbalances and quadrature errors READ BURSt MACCuracy Imbal between the inplace and quadrature components of the IOIMbalance Resulttype ance signal Ka Fre Frequency error of the center frequency currently mea READ BURSt MACCuracy quency sured in the Slot to Measure FERRor lt Resulttype gt Error Hz Burst Average power measured in the slot READ BURSt MACCuracy Power BPOWer lt Resulttype gt dBm Ampli Indicates how much the amplitude decreases over a mea READ BURSt MACCuracy tude sured slot ADRoop lt Resulttype gt Droop dB E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 19 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results The R amp S FSW GSM application also performs statistical evaluation over a specified number of results see Statistic Count on page 93 To do so the same slot is eval uated in m
206. e 177 IQ Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 EEUU RA TE e e 1 1 111111 1111111 1 11 111 1Z7 PM XI User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 87 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Trigger Settings IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger bandwidth at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenu ation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet This trigger source is only available for RF input Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 177 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outsi
207. e 28 measurements increases This leads to a higher variance of the measured relative powers at the offset frequencies and thus to a reduced measurement dynamic For the Power vs Time see PvT Full Burst on page 25 and Power vs Slot see Power vs Slot on page 24 measurements a small Statistic Count increases the variance of the measured slot powers The slot power is required to calculate the PVT limit lines 5 16 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode The GSM application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA appli cations receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval For the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA operating mode the analysis interval corresponds to the GSM capture buffer and is defined by the same settings used to define the data acquisition in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see chapter 6 6 Data Acquisition on page 90 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the R amp S FSW GSM measurement User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 56 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements GSM in MSRA Operating Mode Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus
208. e Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM NI R J H J o Mn Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 185 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 93 INITiate DISPlay lt State gt This command turns the display update during single sweep measurements on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to t
209. e MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 216 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 5 4 11 5 4 1 Analyzing GSM Measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 94 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 92 Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA ENEE 217 DISPlayEWINDowsrns ZOOM S ATQ eie auucacau dre sable egeo eua eue z gan pae e Ee ntu caede haa hdc 218 DISPlay WIND
210. e Power vs Time mask limit lines of all slots See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 For details on the measurement types see chapter 4 Measurement Results on page 15 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure on page 188 Number of Slots to measure This parameter specifies the Number of Slots to measure for the measurement interval of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measure ments Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots on page 188 First Slot to measure This parameter specifies the start of the measurement interval for mulit slot measure ments i e Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following conditions apply e First Slot to measure x Slot to Measure e Slot to Measure x First Slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 96 6 7 2 Demodulation See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet on page 188 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 Slot Settings on page 6
211. e R amp S FSW GSM application e Howto Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 122 e How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 123 e Howto Analyze the Power in GSM Gonals esee 124 e How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Gonals seen 126 9 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defining the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e Forsignals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile
212. e configuration Overview the current frame configuration and slot scope are visualized in a miniature graphic Furthermore the burst type and modulation of the Slot to Measure are indicated Device Band BTS Normal E GSM 900 Slot Scope n NB GMSK Fig 5 5 Frame configuration in GSM application channel bar The graphic can be interpreted as follows Shape Color Meaning imm Each slot is represented by a small box Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols Slots within the defined slot scope are highlighted green n The defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue the burst type and modulation defined for this slot are indicated to the right of the graphic Frame configuration in the Frame and Slot Scope dialog boxes The same graphic is displayed in the Frame Configuration of the Frame dialog box see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 65 and in the Slot Scope tab of the Demodulation dialog box see chapter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 41 R amp S9FSW K10 5 7 Basics on GSM Measurements Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure Multi Slot Measurements e First Slot to Measure E J Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Norm Norm Norm Fig 5 6 Frame
213. e eeh Er ete rete ee aire ier eee ee 140 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 137 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG MMC ee ed Activating GSM Measurements INS Tiumen SEEDS Seege Gi sataccd EE Eege See 141 HERE Wer OTTEN eu DEET 141 SYSTemiSEQUGBEBGOGT EE 141 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a con secutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new mea surement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name o
214. e must comply with the XML schema In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt gt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It
215. e of the Phase Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC PERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 236 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements LAM U s Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Phase error Default u
216. e parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 46 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 153 Modulation Defines the modulation used in the slot The possible modulations depend on the set burst type see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 46 The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected modulation Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe on page 148 SCPIR This parameter is only available for AQPSK modulation It specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constellation see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 38 For an SCPIR of 0 dB the constellation is square as in normal QPSk while for other values of SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SCPir on page 149 Filter Specifies the pulse shape of the modulator on the DUT and thus the measurement filter in the R amp S FSW GSM application For details see chapter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter on page 45 EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 67 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Signal Description The following filter types are supported for normal and higher symbol rate bursts e GMSK Pulse e Linearised GMSK Pulse e Narrow Pulse e Wide Pulse For access bursts only a GMSK Pulse filter
217. e path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data iqw Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 119 See IQ Import on page 119 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Parameters 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 255 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Status Reporting System lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file 11 8 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried vi
218. e zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm re 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 218 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 6 11 6 1 Retrieving Results Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom win dows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 116 See Restore Original Display on page 116 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 117 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from the GSM measure ments e Graphical Resulls eer rre een aa a a ia cae iaa a 219 e Measurement Results f
219. ear is the fastest option SEQuence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algorithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better performance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measurement speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse RST AUTO Example Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Exam ple Determining the EVM on page 269 Manual operation See Symbol Decision on page 99 CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits Value The demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the burst Tail Data TSC Data Tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The Data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the GSM applica tion User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 191 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 7 11 4 7 1 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value DETected STD DETected The detected tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal sig nal STD The standard tail and
220. easurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 103 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE lt DetectorMode gt This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only Parameters for setting and query lt DetectorMode gt PEAK RMS RST RMS Example CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Reference Power on page 104 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Transient Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Transient Spectrum measurement is selected see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate on page 264 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 195 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example Select Transient Spectrum measurement JI measurement o
221. ed Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 163 _L_L____S_ A User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 92 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Data Acquisition 6 6 2 Sweep The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Statistic Count Statiste COUN S tiene 93 Continuous Sweep RUN Rer o KEE 93 Single Sweep RUN SIN QLE ed enidieceo thru etn tne tna ae ko FIR exe 94 IR elle E EE 94 Pes E E sienne NIMIRUM 94 Statistic Count Defines the number of frames to be included in statistical evaluations For measurements on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statistical evaluations The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For details on the impact of this value see chapter 5 15 Impact of the Statistic Count on page 55 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 186 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep
222. ed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser ERE N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 120 How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser Elia S xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Awww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 R amp S FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform common GSM measurements with th
223. ed on from the currently active application see chapter 6 1 Default Settings for GSM measurements on page 59 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the GSM application a GSM measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The GSM menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions o The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application can not only be captured by the GSM application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the J Save or E Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual e Default Settings for GSM measuremtents eene te etna ia 59 e Cohfigurauon OVPSIVIG re iier gege 61 SIGMA DWSSCHPUON Em 63 e Inputand Frontend Settings EE 70 Tigger Settings aea aa aE ED aa EE E E E EA 85 Dale Beete
224. ediate 2 5 neon tnnt tnn tenth innare 263 CONFioure BURGCbPOWert IMMediatel enne nennen rennes rte nnns 263 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer 192 CONFioure BURGrCb TEMolate GE ec 263 CONFigure BURSEPTEMplate TALIQn 2 1 oraret rire retener the rni oda e e ern a nua 193 CONFioure BURGChTEMolstel MMedtatel enn enne 263 CONFigure SPEGtrumkLIMIE RE GCONFigure SPECtr m LIMIERIGEIE icti orc a tete cp ete vinea Ende ve naa eua be ea ede EB u RE CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT si CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate cessent 263 CONFigure SPEGtr m SEL e EE 263 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITChing EIMIT i cien thea ti itte tir Hearne Tta ne unte d Edea e Ea eta ist 195 CONFigure SPEGtrum SWITching lY PE iiie iieri tente rt derepente rera PLE IER ex Ee dk ua TRE Ra 195 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate sesssesessssesesseeeeeeeeenenenene enne nennen nennen 264 CONFigure TRGS ADPSize des CONFigure TRGS NOFBIFIS 1rd Eo te Cn ai E CE RUPEE Eed ERE seen ERE ERE CONFigure T RGSEIMMediate 5 c re rtr amaret een tn on Eun ety ep da ma nd ener enu kon ER Eau 264 CONFioure WGSbechrum MODulaton UIMIT enne tenens enhn rns nn nnn rennen 266 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIS T SELect sese eene nennen 196 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate esses rennen 264 I User Manual 1173 9263
225. eee 236 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERRor RMS AVEhRage eene nnne 237 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent essent 237 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum eese eene nennen 237 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation 237 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIPREAK AVERage 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent esses nennen nnne nnns 231 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIPEAK MANiImum emen rennen 231 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation essere 231 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIRMS AVERage 232 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent 1232 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIRMS MAXimum nnnm nennen enne 232 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIRMS GDEViaton ener 232 EFETChH MCAPture SEOTS MEAGSUFEO acria iere esaa EEPE AIE CLE RYE Cep Ee aan ET HERR EHE FRE aden 226 FETCWMCAPt ure e TEE 226 FE TCh St Cirum MODulsaton REFerence eene nnne nenne neret nene iR tarat Ei ida 239 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL 238 FE TOCh SbECimum SWlTchingREterence A 249 FETCh SPECtrum SWITCHING ALE terina a ER ge i ia Pb nuu andi 248 FE TChW bechum MODulsaton RE Ference nnne eene nree nennen enne nnne 268 FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL sese nee nennen 267 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 289 R amp S9FSW K10 List of Commands FObRMat DE vbort DGEbarator a ES a E Daa eaae aaaea seen ensi eaea sni nnns 220 FORMat DA
226. elected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt t gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 207 Preset All Traces Restores the active traces and trace modes defined by the default settings for the active result displays see table 6 2 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 207 7 1 2 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up t
227. emote ssseeeen 176 IF Power remote m ie RF Power remote A 176 Trigger SOURCE EE 86 External e 87 diae 87 VQ POWED 87 IF Power 88 MSRA Mp S 87 RF POWET 88 Trigger to Sync Graph evaluation method 29 Remote control ee rere Results remote x Table evaluation method 30 Troubleshooting i 131 Input Overload eege n eerte retten 156 Dcra rq ee 129 Defining remote control m Dependency 1 cane i titu n Eee eie Reto east DiSplayirig crier inad eaea ee iret Llimit line time alignment is Middle Of npe edente tees Reference signal sss Slotalignimignt EE 301 Synchronization esesssesee 98 User defiried 5 itv pi Adriaan 68 U MES ULI Merc EE 279 Units Reference level 81 Updating Ixesult display eire nete er reden 94 Result display remote 216 UPOK E 33 Useful part slot 249 BET TRITUM 8 V VAMO ele ot C 36 279 Ww Wide pulse deg deoa eres tette 32 49 Filler iiie tae tene derer 67 Windows Adding remote Closing remote ss Cohfiguring een secet herede tial Layout remote Maximizing remote we Querying remote sss sse Replacing remote sese Splitting remote Types r
228. emote s Window title bar information ee 13 X X value Maneet die ice e etch bt 112 Y Y axis fele M 115 cce enh iene aan ela Bag 279 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating ees Activating Deactivating remote E El DEE Z Zooming Activating remote Area Multiple mode remote Area remote oes DG Tele ME Multiple mode cott entere Multiple mode remote Remote eee Restoring original display Single mode iseeeeeeeeeen Single mode remote sse
229. emote So Transient Spectrum Table remote Trigger to Sync remote ssssssssss Updating the display d Updating the display remote Result summary Trace data terrere tree rine nin 223 RF attenuation Auto SOTIKGy c5 ioc aaea tole tede S Manual softkey RF WAP UE E PR Overload protection remote sss 156 REMOTE e SVa 155 157 RF Power Den e rere 88 Trigger level remote sseessssssss 176 RUN CONT Mr aca 93 RUN SINGLE S Sample rate cerent rtr ner este Digital I O E Digital UO remote POT UE e eeepc REMOTE sc TEENS Saving geo M 118 Scaling AULOMAUC M 115 Deeg 114 115 ciel E M 9 36 38 67 279 FEMOLES COME Me 149 Select Marker Kien Sequence estimator SI nE Aborting remote sssseeen 185 Activating remote we Mode remote A MSRAGSME a seen eaaa Remote ie Sd e TE SFH Slow frequency hopping eese 33 Signal capturing Bic Duration remote ssssssss see also Data acquisition Signal description ioe irent 63 Signal source cmt EE 157 Single sweep Hoi EE 94 Single ZOOM C 116 Slope Meg 89 177 Slots Sen
230. en nennen 46 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period eese nnns 47 5 10 Timeslot Ale Lt ET 50 5 11 Delta to Sync Values eire Reprint rne oei Prnt ere SED R n RaRRCO 53 5 12 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum EEN EEN 54 5 13 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum ENEE EEN 54 5 14 Limit Check for Power vs Time ReSUults cccccecceseseneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeceneeeeneneeeeeeeennes 55 5 15 Impact of the Statistic COUMt 0 cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 55 5 16 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode eese nennen nennen nnn nn 56 NEC Ig e M 59 6 1 Default Settings for GSM measurements eeeeeeeeenenenn enn 59 6 2 Configuration Overview eese nennen nennen nennen nnn tenni nnn nennen 61 6 3 Signal Descriptlon 1 ccce rene terrier in Lern nnne th ua inne tina na En ENNEN 63 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 3 R amp S9FSW K10 Contents 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 7 1 7 2 7 3 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 Input and Frontend SettingS cceeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeesesseeeeseeeeeesseeeeeees 70 Ulee n de E 85 Data Acquisition eee haee eere bia Eve agsia DRER E ERE EX XXER KR YN Ran RR RR DERE BRE FE aou 90 ROT UEL m 94
231. ength on page 64 which are illustrated in figure 5 17 Sit 1 Slot 2 Si 3 Sit 4 Sos Sot 6 So Middle of Middle of Middie of Middle of Maddie of Middle of Middie of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble 156 NSP 187 2 RSP 156 NSP 187 2 RSP 156 NSP 187 2 RSP 157 NSP 188 4 RSP 156 NSP 1872 RSP 156 NSP 187 2 RSP 157 NSP 1884 RSP Slot 0 Siot 1 Slot 2 Sio 3 Shot 4 Siot 5 Skt So Middle of Midamble Middle of Midamble Middle of Midamble Middle of Midarnble Middle of Midamble Midde of Midamble Middle of Midamble Midde of Midamble 156 25 NSP 187 5RSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP S RSP 187 5 RSP 156 25 NSP 187 5 RSP 156 25 NSP 187 5 RSP 156 25 NSP 187 5 RSP 156 25 NSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Fig 5 17 Not equal top and equal bottom timeslot length criteria Note that since the reference point at the middle of TSC of each slot must coincide the length of the guard interval between successive bursts will depend on both the time slot length and the symbol rate of bursts in successive slots As stated in the standard SGPP TS 45 010 for the Equal Timeslot Length case ifthere is a pair of different symbol period bursts on adjacent timeslots then the guard period between the two bursts shall be 8 5 normal symbol periods which equals 10
232. ently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 77 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 164 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Suffix p Parameters Mode Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 77 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 1
233. er 2 Output Output Type User Defined E Level Low Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 Input Output Note that gating is not available for GSM measurements For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual THO GSES OTN c 86 L Trigger SOUPS aecenas este se aai ea de a id Dua aed 86 L Free EE 87 L External Tigger 12 8 e iii 87 CR MANN 87 2 1 d mee 88 uox o DOW EP 88 Eo E 40 TC 88 L Drop TEE 88 ME nt TREE 88 o AMANT EE 89 Mir EE 89 L Trigger E EE 89 MUNG GSR ERE 89 BE sl S07 NENNT 90 xr EUH HE EET HE 90 E Pulse LEPJ cani aE A 90 L Send Toge EE 90 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note Trigger source for MSRA Master e H H Bi User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 86 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Trigger Settings Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 39 For this purpose the
234. eret pere rrr centre 102 Conflg ratiOn ic iseanan iae Euan 65 97 Amplitude Higher symbol rate 35 49 50 66 67 68 Configuration remote sss 169 Normal symbol rate s 66 67 68 Configuration Softkey sss 79 Position within slot eseeseee 68 Settings rette lere teneret 79 Synchronization m 98 Analog Baseband Timing Advance 68 Input settings oerte ornnes 75 TYPE sciens 67 Analog Baseband B71 Type dependency we 46 VQ MOJE reisinin eiieeii mee enne ees 75 MIO EE 40 Input type remote control ssessesesssse 162 Analog Baseband Interface B71 C Input settings 1 ied ee proce ete 75 Analysis Capture buffer Bandwidth t cnet egre tarte ena 91 Result display ENEE 16 zn pr 109 Capture offset Analysis interval MSRA applications S UNDE AEN RES ONU OIN CHEM QI UN IN NEUE 92 Configuration MSRA remote eee 215 Remote e 217 MSRA u Softkey 92 Analysis liio 1 irte erre rtr etes 57 Capture time es 92 Configuration MSRA remote i e e 215 Default ENEE m 60 AQPSK see also Measurement time 0 00 0 eee eects 181 Constellation diagram cccccccccscecssesseetesestetesesteteseees 38 Carriers Modulation sare rear eke cie eene 67 Active 70 ARFCN Active limit check 130 GSM standard E 34 Multiple 69 Attenuation Multiple
235. f the Error Vector Magnitude measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC EVM Usage Query only T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 235 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements M a R M sm rsm g Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Magni tude Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values Result numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC MERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentil
236. f the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 138 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mE U G T e H HA H a Yem qug Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measurement channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the la
237. ffset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 248 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements _ C CONT UM n mg Retrieving Results Abs Rel Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT Status Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC SWIT 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 28 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Transient Spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial
238. ffset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 222 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mAEET O QJ 2c Retrieving Results Return values IQData Measured value pair I Q for each sample that has been recorded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V Example Preset the instrument RST Enter GSM option INST SEL GSM II Set center frequency to 935 MHz FREQ CENT 935MHZ Sample Rate 6 5 MHz TRAC IQ SRAT 6 5MHz Capture Time 1 0 ms SET SWE TIME 1 s Set statistic count to 1 to obtain the UO data of a single capture Otherwise several captures are performed until the set II statistic count is reached Q data is returned from the last capture SWE COUN 1 JI Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Start measurement and wait for sync This performs one sweep or a single UO capture INIT WAI JI Determine output format binary float32 FORMat REAL 32 Read UO data of the entire capture buffer 653751 samples are returned as l Q I Q 1 653751 4 Bytes float32 2 IQ 5230008 bytes TRAC IQ DATA MEM Read 2048 UO samples starting at the begin
239. file are not changed not compressed and thus itis possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the I Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IgTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 280 R amp S9FSW K10 Annex Reference UO Data File Format iq tar A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt A 2 14 I Q Parameter XML File Specification RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz comf file RsIqTar xsd o The content of the UO parameter XML fil
240. g GSM Measurements Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set If no query parameter is defined only the TS or the TSC is returned TSC Only the TSC or TS is returned SET The set of the TSC is returned Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 011 2 13 4 5 6 7 0 1 02 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 22 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TS0 TS1 TS2 USER training sequence for normal burst 0 7 One of the 7 pre defined training sequence codes is used 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TSC number and set for normal burst rates TSO TS1 TS2 Training synchronization sequence for access bursts USER A user defined training sequence is used see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER on page 152 RST 0 Example TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 3 1 JI Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC TSC I 2 3 JI Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC SET I gt 1 Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 68 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER Value This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be in accordance with the defined burst type and modulation as indicated in Number of TSC
241. ger source for MSRA Master CD Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 39 In the default state in MSRA operating mode the Sequencer is active in continuous mode Thus the MSRA Master performs a data acquisition and then the active applications User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 57 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode evaluate the data in turn after which the MSRA Master performs a data acquisition and So on As opposed to some other R amp S FSW applications in MSRA mode statistical eval uation of the traces averaging MinHold MaxHold is not reset after each evaluation in the R amp S FSW GSM application continuous data acquisition in MSRA operating mode over a longer period e g over night and then checking the average or MinHold MaxHold trace to detect any irregular ities in the captured data You can take advantage of this feature in the R amp S FSW GSM application by performing For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Default Settings for GSM measurements 6 Configuration GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key on the front panel When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first time a set of parameters is pass
242. hannell TSC TSC I1 gt 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel1 TSC SET I gt 1 Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 68 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 273 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance lt Offset gt Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot This command is only available for access bursts see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TYPE on page 153 Suffix Number 0 7 Parameters for setting and query Offset offset from slot start in symbols Range 0 to 63 Increment 10 RST 0 Example CONF CHAN SLOT TADV 1 Manual operation See Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 68 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC Value This command selects the training sequence code TSC Normal and Higher Symbol Rate Bursts or training synchronization sequence TS for Access Bursts of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station See 3GPP TS 45 002 chapter 5 2 Bursts This command is not available for AQPSK modulation use CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC instead Suffix lt s gt 0 7 Number of the slot to configure EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 151 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements REESEN Configuring and Performin
243. he con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97637 is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 159 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements o_a OE P At Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 73 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This co
244. he end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 184 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMEN C OI A n Qe Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example For Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 94 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 185 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 141 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 141 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single
245. he limit mask is assigned to it ForMS the 6 dB line of the limit mask depends on the PCL The PCL is derived from the measured burst power Impact of the Statistic Count Generally the Statistic Count defines how many measurements or analysis steps are performed equivalent to the Sweep Count in applications that perform sweeps In particular the Statistic Count defines the number of frames to be included in statistical evaluations For measurements on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statistical evaluations For Trigger to Sync measurements where only one result is calculated per data acqui sition the Statistic Count determines how many values are considered for averaging ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 55 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements GSM in MSRA Operating Mode o Statistic count for Trigger to Sync vs other measurements As mentioned above the Statistic Count for Trigger to Sync measurements refers to the number of data acquisitions whereas for all other measurements the value refers to the number of frames Since usually more than one frame is captured per data acquisition the number of data acquisitions required to obtain the required number of results the Statistic Count may vary considerably If both Trigger to Sync and other result types are active at the same time the latte
246. he manual e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Getting Started printed manual User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 7 R amp S9FSW K10 Preface mm J U Documentation Overview e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and options Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com prod uct FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The user manuals are available in PDF form
247. hile the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 age Bue ee lee ei Te Le 258 STATUus QUEStcRnable DIDTENABle EE 258 STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition ecce nennen nenas 259 STATus QUESttonableDIQ PTRAnSILOTD 2 nara ta ru nana duca etta n nna nam na cava EENEG 259 STATus QUEStionable DIODl EVENt inier eeu donee rent t tuse in ee Ee Ra eee nina 259 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the en
248. iate CONTinuous on page 183 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values Position Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 253 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements n C ONE O s n Retrieving Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 18 See X value on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza
249. ich is used The magnitude responses of all the Measurement filters are shown in figure 5 11 LSE SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 45 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Ce CON C M A O n Dependency of Slot Parameters Measurement Filters for different transmit filters 50 Magnitude dB 100 GMSK Pulse Ln Wide Pulse OMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse 05 0 Frequency MHz 05 1 15 N Fig 5 11 Magnitude Responses of Measurement Filters for Demodulation Measurements 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters The parameters that define a slot used for a GSM measurement are dependant on each other and only the following combinations of these parameters are available in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 6 3 2 Slot Settings on page 65 Table 5 5 Dependency of slot parameters Burst Type Modulation Filter TSC AB GMSK GMSK Pulse TS 0 TS 1 TS 2 User HSR QPSK 16QAM 32QAM Narrow Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 Wide Pulse User NB 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM Linearised GMSK Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 User AQPSK Linearised GMSK Pulse Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 2 Subchannel 1 User Subchannel 2 User
250. ification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 50 dBm to 10 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff lt Time gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this com mand is available for any trigger source not just RF Power Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 174 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Time gt Default unit S EEUU RU RE I UTE SSS Mg User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 176 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PRENNE EM NI R J ag e Configuring and Performing GSM
251. igger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Results 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 239 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results 11 6 6 Power vs Slot Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Power vs Slot evalu ation For details on the individual results see Power vs Slot on page 24 READ vs FETCh commands o Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETChHB RSESPOWerSLOT s AEL AVERage ieeiiie tecnico etian enano ian 240 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot ALL AVERage csse ener 240 FETCI BURSCSPOWer SEOT s ALE CRESID Reen eNee SEENEN RENE 241 READ BURSESPOWer SE tele Eddi due ENNER deeg 241 FETCh BURSESPOWerESE
252. ight Limit on page 103 This allows you to measure the spectrum of the leftor right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Make sure you select the correct Slot to Measure for Modulation Spectrum results see chapter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 Calculating limit lines according to the used DUT For multicarrier measurements ensure that the DUT is configured correctly see chap ter 6 3 1 Frame and DUT Settings on page 63 The number of active carriers and the specified BTS class affect the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement Aligning the limit line correctly The limit line defined by the standard must be aligned to the measured slots The align ment can either be determined individually for each slot or the entire line is aligned according to the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 102 The standard requires that the entire line be aligned according to the Slot to Measure However in this case the Delta to Sync value will be identical for all slots in the scope see table 4 6 I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 130 R amp S FSW K10 10 4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement a a a U L M M a 5 Error Messages Note that the R amp S FSW GSM application assumes that all slots have equal length If they do not disable this setting in the Frame settings see Equal Timeslot Length on p
253. ii een de rna eR Eege 167 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP sss enne ener nnetnret nee rnet nre t eren ennt eren enitn enne 168 SENSe FREQUency CENTer S TEP AUTO ires irre d idet id n inm ame eec rei deed 168 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSe MSRA CAP Ture OFFSelt e uice diga t pede tip Deu besos inepta ei oledd aidan ead duda 217 SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber sessi nennen enne nnne nein 164 IGENZGe IPRODe pD JD GbRhNumber nennen ennt nnan 164 SENSe PROBSsp SETUp MOBPBE i oe eere ER Cn eli lee ced er inven Er esee inane 164 SENSe PROBe sp SETUp NAMEY irte detenido td Ded dede deb epp ep pd AER 165 SENSe PROBSG sp SETUp STATO3 rre eie p ae tet i pe DE D ua Ve dne Dad gd 165 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUp TWDEN Estu AAt ESEA EENE SEAEENEEESEEEENEEEAEA EEn Ea EEEren e En 166 SENSe SWAPiq SENSe SWAPiq SENSE SWEEP ee EE 186 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent sss nennen rennen nre tenenretnn etre trennen nennen 187 SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent eese eene nentes retten nnne 187 EI EES e e UE 181 EISEN e ee E EE 186 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 294 R amp S FSW K10 Index Symbols Tere 82 Mantel C 81 cil Me TEES Mechanical 1 otn ntn eiie deerat 81 TS 45 002 Option B25 e 82 TS 45 004 Protective remote s esses 156 HES E 32 45
254. ility FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use the READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency or FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency commands in newer remote control pro grams Return values lt Result gt numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FERR SDEV Usage Query only FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the measurement of the Modulation Spectrum of the mobile or base station These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Placeholder gt curently irrelevant Freq1 Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz
255. ilter EVM i em 130 Filters frequency response ssec eerren 44 Filters step response Full Burst evaluation method ssssseaesseeeeenseeenan 25 Full burst results remote ssesesss 224 Llimit line time alignment Reference POWER eerte ener re xen Reference time ss esses ill dq 32 35 279 Measurement filter sesssssseee 45 Modulation is reet cosas Ecran itv eov ay rior onde 67 R R amp S BiglCo li EE 74 R amp S EX IQ BOX DIGICONE e 74 RBW at 1800 KAZ i reete teres ees et ceo dea 104 Reference level HEET level RT Automatic vist Digital VO EE eu Ru Offset softkey Reference power PVT vesicle ge Gabes eege Transient Spectrum ge Reference time rnnt inet eher eratac et PVT a eine erai oett dl densities Refreshing MSRA applications sessssseeeeeee 94 MSRA applications remote ssss 216 jill S 94 Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values Capitalization e Character data ein netten etas Data blocks det Kli Ze Optional keywords seseee 134 Parameters ger o E ut Resetting RF input protection scissura 156 Restoring Channel settings tete 62 R s lt diSplays 2 2 rrr eroe t ENEE 15 Constellatioti
256. in nta 230 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation essen nnne 230 READ BURSI MACCUurasy ADROOp AVERage 1 tuae actetuer acer tee Rn en ad azo denis 230 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent eerie ecce eatek a ee n e dz a Eo dna ENN 230 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum isses esent enhn 230 READ BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation eueee iiaiai anna nnn innt 230 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage eeeeesse setis ene tnt aE 231 FETOChBURGOC MAC CuracvlBbOWer CURREN A 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum esses eren enn 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation esses 231 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOWer AVERage eren nnns 231 READ BURSIt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent sss ener 231 READ BURG MAC Curacvl BbOVWer MAxlmum nennen eterne 231 READ BURG MAC Curacvl BbOVWer GD Vlatton eene 231 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIDEAK AVERage eene 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent esses 231 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum 2 ieieeeeeeee eese sienne naa n nnn inh 231 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIDEAkK GDtEViaton nennt 231 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIPEAK AVERage 231 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent esses nennen 231 READ BURG MAC CuracvlfEVMIPEAK MAXimum nnne enne 231 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation e
257. in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure Result for 3 slot scopes e g after a single sweep with statistic count 3 0 002261 0 000577 0 006876 0 000577 0 011492 0 000577 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 16 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe This command queries the positions of the slot scopes in the current capture buffer indi cated by green bars in the result display Return values lt Result gt The result is a comma separated list of positions for each scope with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th scope xLen i is the length of the i th scope in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe Result for 3 slots to measure e g after a single sweep with sta tistic count 3 0 002261 0 001154 0 006876 0 0011
258. in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 157 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 156 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz Therefore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available UO Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e Multi Carrier Group Delay e GSM e VSA INPut FILTer YIG STA
259. inside the captured UO data This is the slowest frame search mode With a Power Trigger the measurement is triggered by the power ramp of the received GSM bursts Nevertheless the GSM application still relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start inside the captured UO data Once a measure ment is completed the GSM application waits for the next trigger event to start the next measurement The search for the frame start is as in Free Run mode except that the I Q data capture is triggered With the External Trigger the measurement is triggered by an external signal con nected to the EXT TRIGGER input of the R amp S FSW The GSM application assumes that the frame start i e the active part in slot 0 directly follows the trigger event An external trigger requires a correct setting of the trigger offset The search is faster compared to the free run and power trigger modes Use an external trigger to maxi mize the measurement speed or if the frame configuration is ambiguous i e if the slot properties are cyclic with a cycle less than the frame duration T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 39 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Defining the Scope of the Measurement Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application For this purpose the trig ger is considered to be
260. ion Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 214 7 2 Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the GSM application are displayed in the evaluation bar in Smart Grid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 115 R amp S FSW K10 Analysis m G ia qe Zoom Functions e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any GSM menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The GSM evaluation methods are described in chapter 4 Measurement Results on page 15 o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 7 3 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar ero doc s 116 Multiple ZOOM RI 116 Restore Original Deman eege dee ihe aie adele 116 Deactivating Zoom Selection E E 117 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are
261. ion a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument Only one measurement channel can be active at any time However in order to perform the configured measurements consecutively a Sequencer function is provided When the Sequencer is activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measure ments are performed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently dis played tab See also the note on using the Sequencer function in MSRA operating mode in chap ter 5 16 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 56 For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 11 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the
262. ion Burst TSC TSC TSC 0 Set 1 Measure only on sync Off Evaluations Window 1 Magnitude Capture Window 2 PvT Full Burst Window 3 Modulation Accuracy Window 4 Power vs Slot User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 60 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration ma eS Aun Configuration Overview Table 6 2 Default traces depending on result display Result display Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture Clear Write s Power vs Time Average Max Hold Min Hold Clear Write EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation Clear Write Graph Blank Modulation Spec Average Clear Write trum Graph Transient Spectrum Max Hold Clear Write Graph Trigger to Sync Histogram PDF of Average Graph Blank Blank 6 2 Configuration Overview R Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important DE currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when EE you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Goeres R Device Band BTS Nor GSM r EX x in dR Fren ARECN 1325 Gt Slot Senne mn mw mm Count vamos GSM I Device Type Input Multi Carrier BTS Frequency Power Class ARFON Source Capture Time Frequency Band Ref Level Level Swap IQ Modulation Level Offset Off
263. ion gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 8 3 6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 9 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Note that the following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control programs User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 262 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mA mE a J HeT Deprecated Commands
264. is setting is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 167 ARFCN Defines the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN The Center Fre quency is adapted accordingly Possible values are in the range from 0 to 1023 however some values may not be allowed depending on the selected Frequency Band This setting is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Remote command CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 167 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 168 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute
265. is supported Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer on page 147 Timing Advance Access Burst only Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot as an offset in symbols from the slot start Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance on page 151 Training Sequence TSC Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled Sync but the functionality is the same The Training Sequence TSC or Sync values are known symbol sequences used to syn chronize the measured signal with the expected input signal in a single slot The available values depend on the modulation as indicated in the table below For user defined TSCs select User and define the training sequence in the User TSC User Sync table For more information on TSCs see Training sequences TSCs on page 37 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC on page 151 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC on page 150 User TSC User Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled User Sync but the functionality is the same Defines the bits of the user defined TSC or Sync The number of bits depend on the burst type and the modulation and is indicated in table 6 3 For AQPSK modulation the training sequence is defined for each subchannel see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 38 Note As the User TSC table in the dialog box only displays 25
266. l operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 112 General Marker Settings The following commands define general settings for all markers EES E M 211 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 113 Marker Positioning Settings The following commands are required to set a specific marker to the result of a peak search CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum AbPtEzak eene nnne nnne nnns 212 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum PDEAKT nennen nnne nnns 212 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eeseseseesesesesesennn nnne enne 212 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM ANimum APE ak 212 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese nnne 212 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeeeeeseseseeeee nennen 212 LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 211 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mAEETA P Wm Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of
267. le carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 123 R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 10 11 12 13 14 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is trans mitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodu lated Select the Display Config button and activate one or more of the following result displays for modulation accuracy and error parameters up to a total of 16 windows e Modulation Accuracy e EVM e Magnitude Error e Phase Error Tip Also activate the Magnitude Capture result display for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preference
268. liSLOT lt s gt SCPIR 1 creciente itte reta ene ce ca nea aae ede 149 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER essere 150 CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel GL OTcezGUlBChannelcchzs T 150 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance isses 151 GONFigure MS CHANnelk SLOTS KE 151 CONFig re MS CHAN el SLOT lt s gt TSC USER iininriiaininiiiianidnnskiainendraniuiinaa daana 152 CONFioureM lcCH AhNnel SL OTcNumberz TvpE 153 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt FILTer Type This command specifies the pulse shape of the ideal modulator Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 147 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements REGN EMEN I R Q o JQ r a m nem Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Type GMSK LINearised NARRow WIDE GMSK GMSK Pulse LiNearised Linearised GMSK Pulse NARRow Narrow Pulse WIDE Wide Pulse RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOT FILT GMSK Manual operation See Filter on page 67 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe State This command activates this slot this means that e g this slot is not considered as inac tive in the PvT eva
269. lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Transient Spectrum diagram see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 The limits depend on the following parameters e Graph Limit check of maximum Max trace e Table Limit check of absolute and relative scalar values EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 54 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 14 5 15 Limit Check for Power vs Time Results e The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal e The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band not for MS Burst Type Modulation Filter not for MS The measured reference slot power Limit Check for Power vs Time Results The determined Power vs Time values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Power vs Time diagram see PvT Full Burst on page 25 and in the Power vs Slot table see Power vs Slot on page 24 The limits depend on the following parameters e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit e The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal according to the following parameters Frequency band special masks for PCS1900 and DCS1800 BTS with GMSK Burst type Modulation Filter The reference burst power is measured and the 0 dB line of t
270. lot to Measure The results are provided in the unit NSP which stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The measured Delta to Sync values have a resolution of 0 02 NSP These values are either assumed to be constant according to the 3GPP standard or measured depending on the setting of the Limit Line Time Alignment parameter Slot to measure or Per Slot According to the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 there are either eight slots of equal length 156 25 NSP or slot 0 and slot 4 have a length of 157 NSP while all other slots have a length of 156 NSP For details see chapter 5 10 Timeslot Alignment on page 50 The timeslot length is defined as the distance between the centers of the TSCs in suc cessive slots By setting the Limit Time Alignment parameter to Per Slot the Delta to Sync values can be measured and used in order to verify the timeslot lenghts Setting the Limit Line Time Alignment to Slot to measure displays the expected values according to the standard and depending on the value of Equal Timeslot Length These values are summarized in Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot to measure 0 No of slots 8 and First slot to measure 0 T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 53 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 12 5 13 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum Table 5 7 Expe
271. lt of the I Q Imbalance When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the I Q Imbalance see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value I Q Imbalance Default unit NONE Example READ BURG IOIM SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the standard deviation measure ment of the IQ Offset taken over the selected number of bursts When the measurement is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the mea surement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 233 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements man n CZTdv K P s Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Standard deviation Default unit NONE Example READ
272. lt s gt DELTatosync READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt DELTatosync This command starts the measurement of the Delta to Sync value for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value For equal timeslot length the expected offset For non equal time slots the measured offset See CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 146 Default unit dBm User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 246 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PVT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep an
273. luation Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt Select the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF CHAN SLOT ON Manual operation See Slot State On Off on page 67 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe lt Modulation gt This command specifies the modulation type Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure _L_________ MN User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 148 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EMEN I R Oe S Y mgmM wx Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Modulation GMSK GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying 1 bit symbol QPSK QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift keying 2 bits symbol PSK8 8PSK EDGE Phase Shift Keying 3 bits symbol QAM16 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 4 bits symbol QAM32 32QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 5 bits symbol RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOTO MTYP GMSK Manual operation See Modulation on page 67 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir Value This command specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance
274. luding the training sequence TSC by measuring the average power in this part over several frames at certain fixed frequency offsets The Modulation Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indicated as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL are shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if either limit is exceeded User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 20 R amp SS9FSW K10 Measurement Results 1 Modulation Spectrum Graph 1 Avg 2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the required filtering The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 22 The following default settings are used for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Table 4 3 Default settings for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard Limit check of average Avg trace See chapter 5 12 Limit Check
275. ment of the channel of interest The output from the Multicarrier filter is used to perform synchronization and demodulation This filter is not applied for Power vs Time or Spectrum measurements For suppression of neighboring channels in the Power vs Time measurement see the Power vs Time Fil ter The frequency response of the Multicarrier filter is shown in figure 5 8 Magnitude Response of the Multi Carrier Filter Passband Detail 80 60 40 20 D 20 40 60 Magnitude dB 600 400 200 0 200 400 600 Frequency kHz Fig 5 8 Frequency Response of the Multicarrier Filter R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements DESEN Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application 5 7 2 Power vs Time Filter The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 25 The following filters are available Single carrier filters e 1MHz Gauss e 500 kHz Gauss e 600 kHz Multicarrier filters e 400 kHz MC e 300 kHz MC The magnitude and step responses of the different Power vs Time filters are shown in figure 5 9 and figure 5 10 respectively In general the smaller the filter bandwidth the worse the step response becomes in terms of ringing effects and the better the sup pression of interference at higher frequencies Gaussian type filters are especially useful for signals with sharp edges as the step response does not exhibit ove
276. mmand Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 113 R amp S9FSW K10 Analysis M Result Configuration Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum ofthe trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 212 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 212 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak on page 212 7 1 3 Y Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here Automatic grid scaling Tra Ze Auto Marker Scaling Bi GT 1 Magnitude Capture gt Automate Gid SeA DEET 115 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values nennen 115 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 115 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 114 R amp S FSW K10 Analysis Display Configuration L Per DIVISI
277. mmand is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 73 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 73 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 73 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 73 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 160 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mAAmE T c
278. mplex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or float64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 284 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data 10at32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value ofthe ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter
279. mum Value This command defines the minimum reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications For the GSM application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 5 1 Data Acquisi tion on page 180 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the GSM measurement Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CALCulate MSRA ALINeG SHOW EE 215 CALCulateMSRACALINBEVALus i ieu d2cd o tite to EEN geg obs nee re oe ea epe deze taa hern dues 216 GALCulate MSRASWINDewsrmIVAE 2 EE 216 INI Tjate EE 216 ISENGeIMSbRA CAbTureOttzGet nennen rere et nennen nsns ese rn ire nn nene 217 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MS
280. n and Timing e 3GPP TS 51 010 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for mobile stations MS e 3GPP TS 51 021 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for base transceiver stations BTS 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard describes the GSM mobile radio network that is in widespread use today In a first step to enhance this net work 8PSK modulation has been defined in addition to the existing GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying modulation With 8PSK the mobile or base station operates in the EDGE mode While the 8PSK modulation transmits 3 bits within a symbol GMSK can only transmit 1 bit within a symbol In a second step to enhance this network higher symbol rate HSR QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation narrow and wide pulse shapes for the Tx filter have been defined Here EDGE Evolution and EGPRS2 are synonyms for this second enhancement This means that GSM includes different modes GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The terms EDGE and EDGE Evolution are used here only when there are significant differ ences between the modes In all other cases the term GSM is used Time domain vs frequency domain A TDMA Time Division Multiple Access and FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access scheme is used to transfer data in the GSM network This means that the digital information is transmitted discretely in the time
281. n captured UO data CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate Only list results are required CONFigure SPECtrum SELect LIST Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL gt 0 933200000 933200000 101 55 36 00 ABS PASSED CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Modulation Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Modulation Spectrum measurement is selected see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 108 66 65 00 ABS PASSED For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Mode For Modulation Spectrum Table measurements this command controls whether offset frequencies are measured up to 1800 kHz or 5800 kHz Parameters for setting and query Mode NARRow The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up
282. n in the Pulse application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop values for the dis played time frequency or symbol range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 13 R amp SS9FSW K10 About the Measurement 3 About the Measurement A basic GSM measurement in the R amp S FSW GSM application includes a power vs time and a spectrum measurement as well as modulation accuracy e g EVM phase error for a GSM signal as defined by the relevant 3GPP standards The I Q data from the GSM signal applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW is captured for a specified measurement time This data is demodulated and synchronized with a reference signal to identify the individual frames and slots The slots of interest are then analyzed in order to display the spectral and power results either graphically or numerically and to calculate the modu lation parameters The standard distinguishes between single slot and multi slot measurements Single slot measurements analyze one slot referred to as the Slot to measure within the GSM frame which consists of 8 slots in total
283. n of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the external generator R amp S FSW B10 the command defines the position of the reference value Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Relative Scaling Reference per Division on page 115 See Ref Position on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 214 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 5 3 Analyzing GSM Measurements Manual operation See Relative Scaling Reference per Division on page 115 See Ref Value on page 115 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINi
284. n page 221 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 252 Transient Spectrum Table The transient spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of the slot scope by measuring the power in these slots over several frames For details see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 The Transient Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if either limit is exceeded Values that exceed either limit are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Transient Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB dBm to Limit dB dBm to Limit Note The graphical results of the transient spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 The following values are displayed IESSE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 28 R amp S FSW K10 Measurement Results Table 4 8 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset kHz Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured Power Nega tive Offsets Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit
285. nd and availability in the network HSCSD allows permanent assignment of up to 4 slots to a mobile Normal and higher symbol rates The modulation modes GMSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM can be used with either normal or higher symbol rate and different Tx filters What is significant for the R amp S FSW GSM application in this respect is that the mobile can send power on a frequency in more than one slot 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS The Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS extension to the GSM standard allows transmission of tvo GMSK users simultaneously within a single time slot Subchannels The standard specifies the downlink signal using Adaptive QPSK AQPSK modulation see 3GPP TS 45 004 where two subchannel binary sequences are multiplexed to eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 36 R amp S9FSW K10 QD Basics on GSM Measurements Short Introduction to VAMOS form a single QPSK sequence The ratio of powers for the subchannels is referred to as the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR One of the subchannels is interpreted as interference The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constellation For an SCPIR of 0dB the constellation is square as in normal QSPK while for other values of the SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Training sequences TSCs A new set of training sequences TSCs has also been proposed see 3GPP TS 45 002 for GMSK signal
286. nd Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 179 Level Output Type lt Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 178 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 180 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 179 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button from the Overview User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 90 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Ech Data Acquisition e Press the BW SPAN SWEEP or MEAS CONFIG key then
287. nd generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 179 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 5 11 4 5 1 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 84 See Output Type on page 84 See Send Trigger on page 85 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port 2 3 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 84 See Output Type on page 84 See Pulse Length on page 84 Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the GSM application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 16 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 56 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual age mires gie E 180 e Configuring and Performing Gweeneg een 18
288. nd query State 110 ON OFF ON TSC search on OFF TSC search off RST 1 Example CONF SSE ON CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Wide Modulation Spectrum measure ment is selected see CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate on page 264 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT command for new remote control pro grams Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example JI Select Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement II gated zero span measurement CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL gt 0 929200000 929200000 104 41 65 00 ABS PASSED A ER A M H a M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 266 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EEG GN GN CN LR n sms J H tenqu Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatib
289. nd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 DELTatosync Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT ss LIMit FAIL READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL This command starts a Power vs Time measurement and queries the result of the limit check for the selected slot Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Note in manual operation the result of the limit check for an individual slot is included in the Power vs Slot results see Power vs Slot on page 24 Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to perform the limit check on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Pass 0 OFF Fail Example READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIMit FAIL Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 247 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 6 7 Retrieving Results For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Transient Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum T
290. ndom and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application tail and TSC bits are specified in the Slot dialog box see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 68 Detected The detected Tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal Standard The standard tail and TSC bits as set in the Slot dialog box are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incorrect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 16 at the positions of the incorrect bits Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits on page 191 Measurement Settings Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed The settings in this dialog box are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Measurement button e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Meas Settings softkey Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 2 Power vs Time Filter on page 44 A limit line is available to determine if the power exceeds the limits defined by the standard in each slot T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 100 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Measurement Settings Device R Measurement Settings TETE slot Sed Power vs Time Spectrum
291. ned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactivated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 211 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 210 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box EEUU EA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 112 R amp S FSW K10 Analysis Result Configuration Markers Marker Settings Marker Search Traces Marker Table Marker Scaling Eise CT 1 Magnitude Capture Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 211 7 1 2 3 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Select Maker seni ttv aod et nto ti e elena na ated cx b idu dove Ue dO RA cus Pax un 113 PG mL 114 LS ER tr Tu EE 114 NRO i EH 114 Select Marker Selects the subsequent marker marker 1 2 3 4 or delta marker to be edited or to be used for a marker function The currently selected marker number is highlighted Remote co
292. ned reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed LE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 81 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration REESEN Input and Frontend Settings NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 171 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 172 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as pos sible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenu ation may be setto automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical
293. nel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT on page 194 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt on page 195 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 103 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration SSS SSS SS aS Measurement Settings Filter Type Defines the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum measurements Normal 3 dB Gauss filter 5 pole according to the GSM standard Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 197 Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List This setting is only required by the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation see Mod ulation Spectrum Table on page 22 In this evaluation the spectrum of the signal at fixed frequency offsets is determined The list of frequencies to be measured is defined by the standard Additionally sparse versions of the specified frequency lists with fewer intermediate frequencies are provided for quicker preliminary tests Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers the modulation RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable The R amp S FSW configures the RBW and VBW internally according to the selected frequency list For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz for the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set to 30 kHz for fre quencies below 1800 kHz and to 100 kHz for 1800 kHz
294. ng commands are required to configure frequency and amplitude settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 166 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 3 1 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements HER IIo s RES 167 e Amplitude e e a Reate Fere Ead E Reboot 169 e Configuring the Attenuation 1 2 cinereae erred erre eo te ERR EEEEEE e 171 Frequency The following commands are required to configure the frequencies to measure Useful commands for configuring frequencies described elsewhere CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 143 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 144 Remote commands exclusive to configuring frequencies CONFg re MS PARF OI T L X 167 SENSe JFREQuency CENTRE 2 reri ert D erit ere eee dee aes Acne 167 ISENSeJPREOuerer GENTSESTED es rne rn ia oon x e RARE dE aa 168 ISENGe JEbRtOuencv CENTer STEP AUTO 168 SENSE FREGUSncy OFF E 169 CONFigure MS ARFCn Value This command specifies the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN to be measured Setting the ARFCN updates the frequency Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Range 0 to 1023 some values may not be allowed depend ing on the selected frequency band Default unit NONE Example CONF ARFC 5 Manual operation See ARFCN on page 79 SENSe FREQuency CENTer
295. ning of data acqui sition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Read 1024 UO samples starting at sample 2048 TRAC IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 I Usage Query only 11 6 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 4 Mea surement Results on page 15 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 223 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 6 2 1 11 6 2 2 Retrieving Results e EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace Results 224 e Pyt Ful Burst Trace RESUS oiee PR MIR hr REM a SIR MES EDDIE 224 e Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results 225 e Magnitude Capture Eesults 2 12 rini rino Fei re ee eb eege 225 e Trggerto sync ReSultS uic pesce vedere ene eere e ie Dc p REID bei th 225 EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace Results The error vector magnitude EVM as well as the phase and magnitude errors are cal culated and displayed for each symbol Thus the TRAC DATA query returns one value per symbol The number of symbols depends on the burst type modulation and number of carriers used for transmis
296. nit NONE Example READ BURS PERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only 11 6 5 Modulation Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 READ vs FETCh commands f Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Fur
297. nnelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This comman
298. ntation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 Slot Settings on page 65 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 41 Slot Settings The Slot settings are available when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Signal Description or Demodulation button then switch to the Slot tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then the Slot to Measure softkey The individual slots are configured on separate tabs The dialog box for the selected slot is displayed directly when you select a slot in the Frame Configuration graphic on the Frame tab see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 65 To configure a different slot select the corresponding vertical tab in the Slot tab Slot structure display The basic slot structure according to the selected Frequency Band and Power Class is displayed graphically for reference White fields indicate unknown data colored fields indicate known symbol sequences The slot settings vary slightly for different burst types TT User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 65 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Signal Description Frame Slot Multi Carrier
299. ntesteadedeane 118 e How to Export and Import UO Data 119 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the toolbar For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Gan z Manual col M 118 Mic EEN 119 luae M MO E 119 L JQ HO iouis dz etii iati cid ck tette t tb atc d 119 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export EE RU M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 118 R amp S9FSW K10 I Q Data Import and Export 8 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data IQ Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Import Provides functions to import data IQ Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 2 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 280 UO import is not available
300. ntrol command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 144 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value PGSM EGSM DCS PCS TGSM RGSM GSM PGSM Primary GSM EGSM Extended GSM DCS DCS PCS PCS TGSM T GSM RGSM Railway GSM GSM GSM RST EGSM Example CONF NETW PGSM Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 64 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs lt Value gt This command the power class of the device under test R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements h_o gt Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 11213 4 5 6 7 8 E1 E2 E3 M1 M2 M3 P1 1 MS and BTS power class 1 2 MS and BTS power class 2 3 MS and BTS power class 3 4 MS and BTS power class 4 5 MS and BTS power class 5 6 BTS power class 6 7 BTS power class 7 8 BTS power class 8 E1 MS power class E1 E2 MS power class E2 E3 MS power class E3 M1 BTS power class M1 Micro M2 BTS power class M2 Micro M3 BTS power class M3 Micro P1 BTS power class P1 Pico RST 2 Example CONF POW CLAS 1 Manual operation See Power Class on page 64 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS CHANnel FRA
301. nual 1173 9263 02 05 189 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements AMET H A A w A H PPHps Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY State If activated only results from frames slots where the Slot to measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behavior of this function depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 189 Parameters for setting and query State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration CONF SYNC ONLY ON Only if the TSC is found the results are displayed Manual operation See Measure only on Sync on page 99 CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold Value This command sets the IQ correlation threshold The IQ correlation threshold decides whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is activated If the correlation value between the ideal IQ signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the IQ correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Parameters for setting and query Value Range 0 to 100 RST 85 Default unit NONE Example CONF SYNC IQCT 0 Manual operati
302. o 4 markers can be configured Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following EEUU RA UT EE SSS 55 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 110 R amp S FSW K10 Analysis a SS SS SSS a a Result Configuration e Inthe Overview select Result Config and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MEAS CONFIG MKR or MKR TO key then select the Marker Config softkey Individual Marker Settings ice sacs ceeded tre rt ri ee aet ederet dete 111 General Marker Settings pace aae ebbe ce kc Dee Ee Rc eed 112 e Marker Positioning FUCO ueri re REENERT 113 7 1 2 1 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Marker All Marker Off Eiser 1 Code DomainPower Marker TY OC iie t e EH HA saute seeded Re E evade Erde nu ena 112 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 22 cccceecccesecneeeetectereenaneneeeerenannectectesenaentenseeees 112 UNITE M 112 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 111 R amp S9FSW K10 Analysis 7 1 2 2 Result Configuration Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command C
303. of the limit lines for the Power vs Time mea surement see PvT Full Burst on page 25 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 193 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 7 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt STMeasure PSLot STMeasure For each slot the mid of TSC is derived from the measured mid of TSC of the Slot to measure and the timeslot lengths specified in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 PSLot For each slot the mid of TSC is measured This provides reason able time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to stand ard However the Power vs Time limit check is also passed RST STMeasure Example CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Manual operation See Limit Line Time Alignment on page 102 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration CONFigure SPECtr mcLIMIELEET 2er iere doe ial aed ER 194 EE Le SPECIrum LIMIER OH outs aeri t e oo ede e he nbn 195 GCONFigure SPECtrum SWITchinig TYIPE uoce cu ren creen rane aaaea 195 Ei Lee H elen RR TEE WEE 195 CONFigure SPECtrumMOBulation EIMIT 2 icut i EENS ee itane E eere aa 196 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect sss nennen 196 SENSe BANDwidth RESolu
304. ogramming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 153 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements _ c ONCC 1 M a sm agmen Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements 11 4 1 3 Multicarrier The R amp S FSW GSM application can also measure signals with multiple carriers The following commands are required to provide information on the carriers in the input signal CONFigure MS MCARrier ACT Carriers 2 2 c eccreccecaneseneeeeeereceacanancaeneeteeeneseseaeanenens 154 CONFigureMS MCARRMerBISClass 2cc 225 2 20062244 aiaa aia aiaa aaa 154 CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTS 2 c cececcneseseeneneneceeeaaeaenneneeeseaeaeaaaaeaeeeeseseseaeanenens 154 CONFigure MS MCAREN STATE EE 155 CONFigure MS MCARrier ACTCarriers lt NofActCarriers gt This parameter specifies the total number of active carriers of the multicarrier BTS to be measured Its value affects the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spec trum due to modulation and wide band noise The limit is changed by 10 log N Parameters for setting and query lt NofActCarriers gt RST 1 Default unit NONE Example CONF MCAR ACTC Manual operation See No of active Carriers on page 70 CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass lt BTSCl
305. om 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 160 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 161 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 73 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration mE 8 a Input and Frontend Settings If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 160 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 160 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 159 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 160 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Interface Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 158 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional softw
306. on See I Q Correlation Threshold on page 99 CONFigure MS DEMod DECision lt Value gt This command determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator The setting of this parameter does not effect the demodulation of Normal Bursts with GMSK modu lation For Normal Bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or Higher Symbol Rate Bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parameter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the K10 and measurement speed eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 190 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements AMET U H m a Aa J gs Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value AUTO LINear SEQuence AUTO Automatically selects the symbol decision method LiNear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forc ing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is rec ommended for high symbol to noise ratios but not for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse filter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recom mended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 16 may occur if the Linear symbol decision algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Lin
307. on and measurement ME Gr 142 ME E 147 e UE ue tiet iue had ted erdt tee eee see ees 154 11 4 4 4 Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test CONFig re MS DEVice TYPE E 142 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND 22 22 lt e ee cceeceeteretanecsseseeenatedenaeceasnedenaes 143 GCONFigure MS NETWOFK ITYPE erre eee decernat e ree ta etu hen ha canned 144 CONFigurer MS POWerClAS E 145 CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUaI 02 cccceeeeneneneneneneceseseseneneaeaeaaeanaanenenenens 146 CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE Value This command specifies the type of device to be measured User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 142 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements ee MEM CI R w a H og s Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters for setting and query Value BTSNormal BTSMicro BTSPico MSNormal MSSMall BTSNormal BTS TRX power class Normal BTSMicro BTS TRX power class Micro BTSPico BTS TRX power class Pico MSNormal MS normal type MSSMall MS small type RST BTSNormal Example CONF DEV TYPE BTSNormal Manual operation See Device Type on page 63 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND Value
308. or TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEcns 223 e Magnitude Capture Eesults 2 1 nid erotico ente eii naue de eeu ANRE AKARANA AREAN ENANA 225 e Modulation Accuracy Results ve tiii Lei tete nere eere 227 e Modulation Spectrum Results erret edd 237 E e e 240 e Transient Spectrum Reste iere erra tine thee a RETI add tence teenies 248 e Togor to SYNC ROUS Sud tone Feet e een dee i enit ined anatase 250 e Limit Check RESUS oct eee err tene cree unn ere e Enna rra nr reed ern eene 251 e Retievilig Matker Results 2 eoe dade pue Ed EENS EEN 252 Graphical Results The results of the trace queries depend on the selected evaluation see chapter 11 6 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 223 E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 219 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements m R OO C a R e Retrieving Results EE DEE 220 FORMaEDEXPOIEDSEPGISIOF oeste Modes biceps re eda MM M RMdien EAS 220 VRC DATA eee aede te etit racine mbi d 221 TRAC STAT AUIS Laudate tinae duet rSn Roi en ann c aab nad a 221 TRACED EE EEN 222 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the
309. or a power trigger that mark the frame start can speed up measurements See also chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 39 GSM measurement as the trigger is defined by the MSRA Master for all applications o In MSRA mode trigger events are not considered when determining the frame start in a simultaneously and most likely does not coincede with the frame start for the GSM signal Avoiding unnecessary high sample rates According to the GSM standard modulation spectrum results must be performed at fre quencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier in some cases When the frequency list to be used is set to 6 MHz in the Measurement settings see Modulation Spectrum Table Fre quency List on page 104 the R amp S FSW GSM application uses a sample rate of 19 5 MHz as opposed to the usual 6 5 MHz sample rate The higher sample rate extends the required measurement time Only use the 6 MHz frequency list setting if you actually require Modulation Spectrum results according to standard 10 2 Improving EVM Accuracy If the EVM results show unexpected power levels check the following issues Extending the data basis Sporadic distortions in the EVM can be eliminated by evaluating several measurements and determining the average over all traces Increase the Statistic Count in the Sweep settings to obtain sufficiently stable results EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 129 R amp S9FSW K10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement
310. or value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAX 0 35961171984672546 Query the averaged phase error RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage gt 0 082186274230480194 R amp SS9FSW K10 Annex Reference List of abbreviations A Annex Reference AA List of abbreviations inerenti nter annee Reden ie nda n nnne nanus eei 279 A 2 NQ Data File Format iq tar eeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeee enne nnne nnne nnns 280 A 2 1 Q Parameter XML File Gpechflcatton sess 281 A 2 2 WO Data Binary Elei 284 A 1 List of abbreviations 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 32QAM 32 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 3GPP 3 Generation Partnership Project 8PSK Phase Shift Keying with 8 phase states AQPSK Adaptive Quadrature Amplitude Modulation ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number BTS Base Transceiver Station DL Downlink MS to BTS DUT Device Under Test EDGE Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution EGPRS Enhanced General Packet Radio synonym for EDGE EGPRS2 Enhanced General Packet Radio and support of additional modulation coding schemes and higher symbol rate FDMA Frequency Division Multiplex Access GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GPRS General Packet Radio Service GSM Global System
311. ore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Note The duration of one GSM slot equals 15 26 ms 0 576923 ms The duration of one GSM frame 8 slots equals 60 13 ms 4 615384 ms Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The Capture Time for the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode defines the length of the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual The Capture Time can also be defined using the softkey which is available from the SPAN BW or SWEEP menus Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 181 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 217 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Tip Try this function if the TSC can not be found On and Q signals are interchang
312. ot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 244 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum
313. oth narrow and wide pulse shapes are illustrated at the top of figure 5 14 where you can see that the center of the pulse occurs at 3T with T being the reduced symbol period For a sequence of symbols 4 the transmitted signal is defined in the standard as y t Y s c t iT 2 57 The transmitted signal for a sequence of symbols 5 3 where User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 49 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 10 Timeslot Alignment c t the transmit pulse which may be either the narrow or wide pulse Note that the standard specifies The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the transmit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Evo Transmit Pulses un Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse e Amplitude normalized e e e in 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time Reduced Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude On Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse
314. out SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter perma nently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 204 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PEEEMLEREEEN H uA eQ Analyzing GSM Measurements y 100 x 100 y 100 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right corner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50
315. ow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm MU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 217 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 5 4 2 Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 116 See Restore Original Display on page 116 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 117 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essere nnn 218 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomz GTATe 219 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multipl
316. ower in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate READ AUTO LEVTime This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required reference level and the trigger offset automatically Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE and CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE for new remote control programs Return values lt ReferenceLevel gt The detected reference level RST 0 dBm Default unit variable lt TriggerLevel gt The detected trigger level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 268 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements pec A R R ERE UEEEU M TT Programming Examples lt TriggerOffset gt The detected time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep RST Os Example READ AUTO LEVT PASSED 9 2404 0 00000007695 1 4 0 READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing obsolete This command reads out the gating settings for gated Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements It is identical to READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing obsolete andis maintained for compatibility reasons only Example READ SPEC
317. p S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 178 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 178 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 179 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 178 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 180 IECH User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 84 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 5 d Trigger Settings
318. r are finished first and the traces in particular the current measurement trace remains unchanged until the Trigger to Sync measurement has also finished The counter in the channel bar counts the slower of the two events i e the number of measurements if a Trigger to Sync result display is active In MSRA mode only a single data acquisition is performed by the MSRA Master and the R amp S FSW GSM application analyzes this data repeatedly Thus the Trigger to Sync measurement will only count one data acquisition and can never reach a larger Statistic Count value Tip You can query the current value of the counter for both Trigger to Sync and other measurements in remote control as well See chapter 11 4 5 2 Configuring and Per forming Sweeps on page 182 Obviously the Statistic Count has an impact on all results and values that are re cal culated after each measurement The higher the count the more values are taken into consideration and the more likely the result of the calculation will converge to a stable value On the other hand the fewer measurements are considered the higher the var iance of the individual results and the less reliable the calculation result will be For instance if the Statistic Count is set to values smaller than 5 the measured refer ence power for Modulation Spectrum Table see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 and Transient Spectrum Table see Transient Spectrum Table on pag
319. r to Sync Results The following commands are required to query the numeric results of a Trigger to Sync measurement For details on the individual results see Trigger to Sync Table on page 30 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided for each result type which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCh BURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVEFtage eese remote etude create SEENEN rec 250 FETCHBURSEPTEMplate TISOSIGUESIRODU urea dee Eege E ia 250 FETCHBURStPTEMplate TRGG MANimum eene nennen neret enne 250 FETCHIBURSEPTEMplate TRGS MIN Meer 250 FETCh BURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDEViation 2 Idee deberi dtu decre de 250 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVERage ice ecacs eai it nennt a dn aa ss Addi hn 250 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS OURISBE i2dccdzux pa eade dui epe Sdt 250 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MAXImu Lit Lade teeth ipaa ER eu eere ea iiaia 250 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MINIFIUER caa oi tiri ohm RE io iret Rabe eene 251 READBURGGCPTEMplate TRGG GDEViatton nennen 251 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum FETCh BURSt P
320. r to Sync table T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 30 The Trigger to Sync table shows the following values Value Description Current Trigger to Sync value for current measurement in us Average Trigger to Sync value averaged over the Statistic Count number of measurements Min Minimum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of meas urements Max Maximum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of meas urements Std Dev Standard deviation of the individual Trigger to Sync values to the average value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results chapter 11 6 8 Trigger to Sync Results on page 250 R amp SS9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Relevant Digital Standards 5 Basics on GSM Measurements Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in GSM measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards The measurements and the physical layer the layer of the GSM network on which modulation transmission of RF signals reception of RF signals and demodulation take place is defined in the standards Table 5 1 GSM standards e 3GPP TS 45 004 Details on Modulation e 3GPP TS 45 005 General measurement specifications and limit values e 3GPP TS 45 010 Details on Synchronizatio
321. race 112 up Norm Delta EE Outputs Config 2 inf zz Preamp nai ftierit eene ten eta Ref Level zeg Ref Level Offset entr dEEEN ENER eeng Refresh woccs cei cancssses nnt rr rrr RF Atten Auto Tee ME Trace Te Trigger Config P Trigger Offset i rii teeth User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 R amp S FSW K10 Index Specifics for ConfIQUratiori i iion trees 62 Spectrum Ip RS 103 Statistic COUNT uci rro e eerte Eee 93 129 Default Impact ISemole x actin picti taies 186 Statistics Paramete S ois deii ette RR 20 Programming example 269 273 276 Status registers COMMONS T 256 DDeScriptiOl een ett eet Eden te re 256 GSM 256 e 256 260 STAT QUES POW trennt tritis 156 STATus QUEStionable DIQ STATus QUEStionable SYNC Status reporting system sssssssssssssssess Subchann els E hetero deren El n Suffixes COMMON ERO Remote commands i T x ep acujccv Sweep ADOMING sirrien ie ia Seltiligs uie eene pecie tet Time remote Symbol decision esse debs cscs ea e erret Symbol period SPSK qe geed 48 49 Symbol rates E le nz tC 36 Neun mee H 36 Sync is User defin amp d WEE 68 Syrichronizatlorn 4 c deett eerie IP egenis 98 Default m Limit UE 102 Measure only on S
322. racy Current Average 16911 34 1 10 The following modulation parameters are determined E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 18 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results mm m M O sn Table 4 1 Modulation accuracy parameters Param Description SCPI query for result value eter EVM Error vector magnitude for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK lt Resul gt RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per SUD CUM cent READ BURSt MACCuracy 3 EVM RMS lt R i gt 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all S Sep ieee EVM results for all frames in entire measurement fall READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM Mag Magnitude error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK Resul gt Err r RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per RE SCHER Cent READ BURSt MACCuracy e MERRor RMS Resul 2 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all Me S SSES Magnitude Error results for all frames in entire measure READ BURSt ment fall MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor Phase Phase error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK Resul gt Seet RMS and peak error values for the current frame in per dm EBORE cent READ BURSt MACCuracy e
323. re Number of Slots to measure 1 EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 240 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements M a pr e att Retrieving Results Return values Result numeric value Average Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL CRESt This command starts the measurement and reads out the crest factor for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURS
324. rement e Define the PvT filter to be used for selection criteria see chapter 5 7 2 Power vs Time Filter on page 44 e Define how the limit line defined by the standard is to be aligned to the measured slots and whether the relative positioning of the TSCs is measured or derived from the position of the specified Slot to Measure only For measurements strictly according to standard use the default Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure For non standard signals or signals with conspicuous slot timing use the Per Slot setting Tip use the Delta to Sync result of the Power vs Slot measurement to verify the slot timing 10 Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for power results up to a total of 16 windows e PvT Full Burst power graph of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope over time _L_L_L LL_ M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 125 R amp S FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 4 11 12 13 14 15 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals e Power vs Slot table of power per slot in the current frame and over all frames Tip Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a
325. rement Settings To perform the measurement according to the 3GPP standard set the reference power to RMS and the Slot to Measure to the slot with the highest power See 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 Transmitter characteristics For GMSK modulation the term output power refers to the measure of the power when averaged over the useful part of the burst see annex B For QPSK AQPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM and 32 QAM modulation the term output power refers to a measure that with sufficient accuracy is equivalent to the long term average of the power when taken over the useful part of the burst as specified in 3GPP TS 45 002 with any fixed TSC and with random encrypted bits See 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 5 2 Switching transients spectrum The reference power for relative measurements is the power measured in a bandwidth of at least 300 kHz for the TRX under test for the time slot in this test with the highest power RMS Default The reference power is the RMS power level measured over the useful part of the Slot to Measure and averaged according to the defined Statistic Count Peak The reference power is the peak power level measured over the selected slot scope see chapter 6 7 1 Slot Scope on page 95 and its peak taken over Statistic Count measurements GSM frames Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE on page 195 6 8 3 Trigger to Sync The Trigger to Sync measurement allows for further configuration User
326. res the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 174 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 173 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements REALE O 9 M n Hx m Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Drop Out Time on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters ard RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Offset on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the
327. result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 28 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated measurements of the reference power of the Transient Spectrum measurement see Transient Spectrum Table on page 28 Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or Exter nal and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 4 4 Triggering Measurements on page 173 EEUU RA UTE e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLLI MIS AX User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 249 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 6 8 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured Example READ SPEC SWIT REF GAT Result 0 00000185076 0 00054277002 Usage Query only Trigge
328. results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 LEE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 234 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the UO Offset Sup pression When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measure ment via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the UO Offset Suppression see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value IO offset suppression Default unit dB Example READ BURS OSUP SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile o
329. rete rente aede RR kenne ne rn 265 GONFigurerMSEPOWenAUTOONIGE EE 266 CONFigure MS SSEaEch 2 1 ertt mete t neti ee io RE Eee Ye s 266 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMIT innert tnn iiaii aaia 266 FETCH BURSU MACCUracy FERROSAVERage EE 267 FETCh BURSI MAGCuracy FERRor CURREN criai aa riina 267 FETCHBURSIEMACCuracyl FERRO MAXIMUM enoii ieaiai iiaiai aaa 267 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation eise 267 READ BURSIt MAC CuracvlFERRor AVERage eene nnne rehenes 267 READ BURSI MACCuracy FERRor CURRent eiii enne ala SL eerta ERA PR UO Re ra ER 267 READ BURSIt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum cessisse nennen enne nere 267 READ BURSI MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation eeeeseeeiiieeeen ensi nnn anna 267 FETCh WSPectrum MODUulation ALL 24222 222 coiere ai EEN pea ENER EEN 267 READ WSPectrunMObDulation ALL I uec teu haie Rr unte eurn SEENEN 267 FE TChW bechum MODulaton HRtterence ener 268 READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate esses 268 READ AUT OPE up Im EMT 268 READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing obsolete cesses 269 CONFigure BURSt ETIMe IMMediate CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PFERror IMMediate CONFigure BURSt POWer IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate SELect Val
330. rictions see Restriction for auto frame configuration on page 37 and SCPIR Note The auto frame configuration typically does not work with frequency hopping sys tems unless the trigger offset is set correctly In this case not every frame is populated by a modulated GSM signal A workaround is to use auto frame configuration with a manually set trigger offset Set Synchronization None e Set the trigger offset manually in the Power vs Time measurement e Set Synchronization back to Burst TSC or TSC e Press the Auto Frame Config softkey to run the auto frame configuration measure ment Remote command CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE on page 198 RETTULIT EE 7 e e A A1L 1LLuNuLAALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILAUUUASS J User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 107 Adjusting Settings Automatically Automatic Trigger Offset If activated the trigger offset for external and IF power triggers are detected and auto matically measured This function is not available in MSRA mode For details on the trigger offset refer to Trigger Offset on page 88 Remote command CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE on page 199 R amp S FSW K10 T 7 1 Analysis Result Configuration Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be con figured via the Result Configuration dialog box which is displayed when yo
331. rigger to Sync CONFigure TRGS NOFBins Value This command specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Number of bins Range 10 to 1000 RST 10 Default unit NONE Manual operation See No of Bins on page 106 CONFigure TRGS ADPSize Value This command specifies the number of measurements after which the x axis is fixed for the histogram calculation of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Adaptive data size Range 10 to 1000 RST 100 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Adaptive Data Size on page 106 11 4 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings CONFigurel MS AUTG FRAMG ONCE EE 198 CONFigure MS ADTO LEVel ei Te 199 CONFigurerpMSEAUTO TRIGSer ONCE 2 2 22e Re ennt ebore dae on Ra reo Rhe AER 199 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME ciere oer oet ipee ze EERSTEN EE 199 CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE Value This command automatically performs a single measurement to detect the optimal frame configuration i e frame and slot parameters depending on the current measurement settings and results This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 198 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote
332. rotocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abor tion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in max hold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions Example for Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sweeps and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 94 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 183 R amp S9FSW K10 Remot
333. rovided The frequency range of the frequency list however can be configured to be wider or narrower see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 104 The RBW and VBW are then adapted accordingly Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL on page 238 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate on page 239 Phase Error Displays the phase error over time 5 Phase Error 21 Avg 2 Max e3 Min e4 Clrw The following default settings are used for a Phase Error vs Time measurement EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 23 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurement Results Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check None Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PERR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 221 Power vs Slot Displays the power per slot in the current frame and over all frames The result of the Power vs Time limit check is also indicated Note The power is measured for inactive slots but not for slots outside the slot scope see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 40 4 Power vs Slot Slot Limit The following power values are determined Table 4 6 Measured power values for Power vs Slot
334. rshoot g Magnitude Response of Power vs Time Filters 20 T T T T T T 1 MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss 600 kHz 400 kHz MC 300 kHz MC Magnitude dB 9 4 3 2 4 0 1 2 3 4 Frequency MHz Fig 5 9 Magnitude Response of the Power vs Time Filters _L_______ M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 44 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 7 3 dB Magnitude Fig 5 10 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application Step Response of Power vs Time Filters 1 MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss 600 kHz 300 kHz MC Lo 8 05 1 15 2 25 Time us Step Response of the Power vs Time Filters Measurement Filter The Measurement filter is used to limit the bandwidth of the demodulation measure ments and is described in the 3GPP standard document TS 45 005 for QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM as follows e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 90 kHz for normal symbol rate and for higher symbol rate using narrow bandwidth pulse shaping filter e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 108 kHz for higher symbol rate using wide bandwidth pulse shaping filter In addition to these filters a Measurement filter for GMSK is used in the R amp S FSW GSM application to limit the effects of out of band interference due to the high sampling rate of 6 5 MHz wh
335. s Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the Magnitude Capture for irregular behavior e g an unexpected rise or fall in power If such an effect occurs determine whether it occured in the current slot Scope and current slot to measure compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail If necessary change the slot scope or slot to measure to display the slot of interest e g using the softkeys in the GSM menu Now you can analyze the Magnitude Error Phase Error or EVM for that slot Compare the current results of the EVM with those of previous measurements to find out if the error occurs only sporadically or repeatedly 9 3 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the GSM application User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 124 R amp S FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application mm a qo aT How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defining the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modula
336. s The previous TSCs for GMSK bursts are listed as Set 1 while the new TSCs are listed as Set 2 AQPSK signals can be formed using TSCs from Set 1 on the first subchannel and TSCs from either Set 1 or Set 2 on the second subchannel In case a TSC from Set 2 is used it should match the TSC from Set 1 i e TSC lt n gt from Set 1 on subchannel 1 should match TSC n from Set 2 on subchannel 2 for n 0 7 TSC vs Midamble The terms TSC and Midamble are used synonymously in the standard In this documen tation we use the term TSC to refer to the known symbol sequence in the middle of the slot The R amp S FSW GSM application supports measurement of the following signals e GMSK bursts using the TSCs from Set 1 or Set 2 e AQPSK bursts with combinations of TSCs from Set 1 and 2 on the subchannels e AQPSK bursts with a user specified SCPIR The following measurements of the above signals are supported e Power vs Time e Demod Modulation Accuracy EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation e Spectrum modulation transient including limit check e Automatic trigger offset detection QD Restriction for auto frame configuration Auto Frame configuration only detects AQPSK normal bursts where the subchannels have a TSC according to table 5 3 The SCPIR value is detected with a resolution of 1 dB To obtain reliable measurement results on AQPSK normal bursts compare the auto detected slot set
337. s defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated in the lower part of EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom where it can be seen that _L_________ N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 48 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Definition of the Symbol Period the decision instant corresponding to the center of the transmit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Transmit Pulse o9 oS o N E 1 o amp a S 0 5 E s 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude 1 5 o E H e Decision Instant E 1 o a S 05 S Symbol Period Tag 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 13 EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom The description above also applies to the 16QAM and 32QAM modulations defined for EDGE Evolution using the normal symbol rate 5 9 3 QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Higher Symbol Rate For the newer reduced symbol period higher symbol rate the standard document SGPP TS 45 004 defines two transmit pulse shapes the so called narrow and wide pulses The narrow pulse is the same linearised GMSK pulse as described in chap ter 5 9 2 BPSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Normal Symbol Rate on page 48 while the wide pulse was designed based on a numerically optimized set of discrete filter coefficients B
338. s on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters o How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Noise SOUE iecccsciecaadecevsaxuuganendeande a a a i e aa eaa 83 Ig 84 Geh Ge 84 5 m 84 L ai 84 Eo oW ons RATEN TENER INCURRERE UE 85 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 83 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration SS SS Sn SS Input and Frontend Settings External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 166 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R am
339. s only available if the Device Type is a BTS type see Device Type on page 63 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 69 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Input and Frontend Settings Activating this checkbox has the following effects e An additional multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path of the R amp S FSW GSM application This filter can for example suppress up to six adjacent channels with a channel spacing of 600 kHz from the measured channel at the set center frequency and 30 dB higher power compared to the measured channel This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal in order to get meaningful EVM values Otherwise there would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the reference signal e Additional multicarrier parameters become available Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs on page 154 No of active Carriers Specifies the total number of active carriers of the multicarrier BTS to be measured Its value affects the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modu lation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise The limit is relaxed by 10 log N dB for frequencies 2 1 8 MHz Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier ACTCarriers on page 154 BTS Class Defines the base station class The specified BTS Class effec
340. sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 141 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 185 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements aa a CCN I R JV na A s n Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been performed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequen
341. set Statistic Count E Es Signal Description Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition Demodulation Measurement Result Config Display Config d Slot Scope Y Axis Synchronization TSC Measure only on Sync In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 61 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration SSS SS SS a eS Configuration Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 3 Signal Description on page 63 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 70 3 Triggering See chapter 6 5 Trigger Settings on page 85 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 6 Data Acquisition on page 90 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 6 7 Demodulation on page 94 6 Measurement Settings See chapter 6 8 Measurement Settings on page 100 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 109 8 Display Configuration See chapter 7 2 Display Configuration on page 115
342. sion as well as the oversampling factor used internally by the R amp S FSW GSM application The following table provides an overview of the possible number of symbols Table 11 5 Number of trace result values for EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error measurements Burst Modula Multi No of trace points Comment Type tion carrier BTS AB GMSK any 348 87 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov NB GMSK OFF 588 147 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov this corresponds to the useful part of the burst see 3GPP TS 45 004 2 2 Start and stop of the burst NB GMSK ON 568 samples ov oversampling factor 4 ee symbols NSP This corresponds to the useful part of the burst exclud SE ing the tail bits to allow the multicarrier filter to settle NB not GMSK any 142 symbols NSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 this corresponds to the useful part of the burst exclud ing tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 8 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude HSR any any 169 symbols RSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 this corresponds to the useful part of the burst exclud ing tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude NSP Normal Symbol Period symbol duration for normal symbol rate normal bursts RSP Reduced Symbol Period symbol duration for higher symbol rate HSR bursts
343. softkey only con trols the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 93 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 7 Demodulation has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not individ ual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 183 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highligh ted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 184 Continue
344. spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL NOFS 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence j eesseacene Configuring Data Acquisition Define a statistic count of 10 i e 10 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 10 Define a capture time for 10 statistic count 2 headroom GSM frames Capture Time 1042 frames 4 615 ms frame 0 0554 s Thus all 10 statistic count frames can be analyzed with a single capture SENSe SWEep TIME 0 0554 s Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI 11 10 3 Programming Examples Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM power measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with access bursts in a remo
345. st measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see table 11 1 Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 1
346. t command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB _L_________ a User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 241 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum This command starts the measurement and reads out the maximum power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 25 Further res
347. t gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt 11213 Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 175 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mE CU J ur Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Settings on page 86 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preampl
348. taining the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 EET RU UE SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 140 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements ua a CI Wa J P ee t Activating GSM Measurements INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 138 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt GSM GSM application R amp S FSW K10 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 62 SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will o
349. te This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters State Example ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 168 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 3 2 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 79 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 156 INPut IMPedance on page 157 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 145 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision eese 169 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTRACGevtSCALelbRLEVel nennen 170 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet esses 170 DISPlayEWINBowens TRAGe Y SCAlLe
350. te environment 2 Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt EE Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM n Slot 0 configuration Activate slot 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB GMSK modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 0 1 A Slot 1 configuration Activate slot 1 Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Access Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE AB Set TSO CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Query TS CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Access burst has a timing advance offset from slot start of 1 symbol CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TADV 1 Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTA4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF djscesessscsz Demodulation and Slot Scope Config
351. the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source ENS D nr MCA Input Source Power Sensor Probes Frequency External Input Coupting Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 Q High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Presclector Baseband Input Connector Baseband Input I input Couphnig EET 71 MVNA E A T 71 Figli Pass Filter DE EE 72 bdlczurco irr ME 72 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 156 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 71 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration 6 4 1 2 Input and Frontend Settings 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value
352. ther results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt commands EEETERILTU RU EIE E 1 1 LLLLLA AALLLLX M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 237 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mLA Q C G e Retrieving Results FETCh SPECtrum MODUlation ALL eee ceee eese eene enne nane nnda idani ininda 238 READ SPECt m MObDUuletien ALL uo2 2d oo E2 deuote t datur ASSEN ees 238 FETCh SPECIrumtMOB lation REF erence 5 2 ccs ede ne iecur eed Lek eee needs 239 READ SbtCirum MODulation HREFerencel MMediatel en eeoeorrrnnnnerererenens 239 READ SPECt m MODulationi NN A KE 239 READ 2WSPectr m MODulation GATing iii caeco erri Lettere epa tk Roe ns e keys 4E ED aR 239 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and returns the modulation spectrum of the mobile or base station This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas with one list for each measured frequenc
353. tings with the settings of your device under test Table 5 3 Required subchannel TSC assignment for AQPSK auto frame configuration AQPSK Subchannel 2 TSC j Set 1 TSC j Set 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sub TSC 0 x x x x cha i 1 x x x x User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 37 R amp S9FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements AQPSK Modulation AQPSK Subchannel 2 TSC j Set 1 TSC j Set 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 nnel Set 2 x x M x 1 1 3 x x x x 4 x x x 5 x x D 6 x x x 7 x x x 5 4 AQPSK Modulation The AQPSK modulation scheme as proposed for use in GSM systems is illustrated in figure 5 3 First the bits from two users subchannels 1 and 2 are interleaved The com bined bit sequence is then mapped to an AQPSK constellation which depends on the SCPIR value The AQPSK symbols are then modulated using the linearized GMSK pulse see 3GPP TS 45 004 SCIPR Sub chanel 1 bits ao a Mierer Lied M iia Bee 7 die wees Sub chanel 2 bits bo b pping Fig 5 3 AQPSK modulation scheme for GSM systems The proposed AQPSK mapping as assumed in the R amp S FSW GSM application is given in table 5 4 and illustrated in figure 5 4 where the first leftmost bit corresponds to sub channel 1 and the second
354. tion e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e Forsignals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is trans mitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Selectthe Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodu lated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Power vs Time measu
355. tion TYPE eccentric 197 READ 2WSPectrum MOBulation GATIRng aiio ect eee teenies 197 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT State This command controls the left limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph mea surement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Tran sient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 E MN User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 194 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PREGNANT mM Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 103 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt State This command controls the right limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph mea surement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Tran sient Spectrum m
356. tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 183 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 18 EES User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 254 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 11 7 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application can not only be measured by the GSM application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 8 1 Q Data Import and Export on page 118 MMEMary EOADIQIS TATG crecer tec c gere tnmen rne en Run m n cr aaa 255 TEE elek e TE EE 255 MMEMoborng S TORS IQ STATS root iterum EATA Pe ege E Ue dose oou 255 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iqw Parameters lt FileName gt String containing th
357. tions up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time the following commandas are required to configure the markers Ee EIER NEE 209 CAL Culate lt sn gt DEL Tamarkersm gt STATE enne nennen 209 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe 210 CALCulatesmsMARKersmeoES TATe 22 2222 uat repete teen aeo su eade bna aset pascha cites 210 GAEGulatesnsMARKeremesNOEPF edr e eet e Prater Ea aAA 210 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz TR ACe nene 211 CALCulate n DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first E C s V U DOUEOQQUL P SIJIJX GD2QUcgcvo oo A Ab IA MA ODKLLLLLLICAEL LELL User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 209 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements LAEMETAM CU u A GJ Analyzing GSM Measurements No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 112 See Marker Type on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that
358. tivating GSM Measurements eese nennen nnne nennen 137 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements eene 142 Analyzing GSM Measurements esee nennen nennen nnn nnns 200 Retrieving Results tette RRRRERRRRR Rea Rex ERR RREERa AR 219 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eren 255 Status Reporting EE E E 256 EEUU RU UO EE 8 e e 1LLL L L L LLLLMLLLELSEX User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 4 11 9 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 262 11 10 Programming Examples eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene nennen nennen nennen nnn nennen nnn nnne 269 A Annex RefereliGe iuiceueceeeeesnuuauaaua anna nana dod En CREER FR E FRU An pana d daa dd 279 A1 List of abbreviations iicet enin nn hein eh Ee ann RA EN Rn RR Ee Rae mua 279 A Z NVQ Data File Format iq tar ceeee retorno reete ann RD n xo da aree Rus 280 List OF e E TE 286 dem H 295 R amp S9FSW K10 Preface About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This GSM Measurements User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the meas
359. to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz NSParse More compact version of NARRow The sample rate is 6 5 MHz WIDE The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz WSParse More compact version of WIDE The sample rate is 19 5 MHz RST WIDE User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 196 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements PRNEEMLERECGEE 9 a e P Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Example CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NARRow Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 104 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE Type This command switches the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum and Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement Parameters for setting and query Type NORMal P5 NORMal Gaussian filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This value is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only P5 5 Pole filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This filter is required by the GSM standard specification RST P5 Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation
360. ts the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise and chapter 4 3 2 Base Transceiver Station search for Multicarrier BTS Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass on page 154 6 4 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Input Source Settings iuc rere ceret acere rh cene nra Een eden 70 Fregusncy Seuls oie ripeto s D E hoe b AE a edlen 77 Amplitude u ME 79 CUPI SENOS TEE 83 6 4 1 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 70 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration SSS SSS SSS Input and Frontend Settings Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency Inpllit ruere etcetera erp Ha rte thee EUREN SEENEN ENEE ek etas 71 e Digtal UO laputSeltigjs iiie teen erii cba fib AAA eta Reda 72 e Analog Baseband Input Settings sse 75 LIB PODE Uo ETT 76 6 4 1 1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for
361. ture time for auto detec tion This setting can currently only be defined in remote control not in manual operation Tip increase this value if less than every second GSM frame contains a signal Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Auto level measurement sweep time Range 0 01 to 1 RST Dis Default unit S T User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 199 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Analyzing GSM Measurements Example CONF POW AUTO SWE TIME 0 01 MS 11 5 Analyzing GSM Measurements General analysis settings and functions concerning the trace markers windows etc are available for GSM measurement results e Configuring the Result Display 200 Result CODING EE 207 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 215 e Zooming into the Display uiris e iade Led SSES 217 11 5 4 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commands 21 i ect tec dt i eter des ge tdeo 200 e Working with Windows in the Display urere 201 11 5 1 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independant of the application Rs FORMAT T EIA 200 DISPlaypWIMBowsr SlZE aluet ette adea eee enne etre tbe a ne e expe acuden 200 DI
362. u do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Result Config button e Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the Result Config softkey Result Configuration EC 109 RI ee ene EE 115 ZOOM FUNCIONS cere eter AN nieces needed dean aise Aes 116 Result Configuration Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 62 EE c eae ee A P SA E EE 109 Malkglhs us n eee e a te dede becca buddies dose E NM EL EE AA 110 Cc c ELE 114 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 62 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings Traces Scaling Quick Config Seleeliemiem 1 Magnitude Capture User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 109 R amp S FSW K10 Analysis SSS SSS n Result Configuration Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace ilfrace cccecccccessececceesececeeeeseeceaesececsseceeceaaeseseneuseeteagenees 110 Trece MO ide Ee Rd Ma teres daa iod d av odd D Edi 110 Preset All Ee setti rrr pae er en iare coa ee dog eee Ner epe YA RN NEE 110 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys e nnne 110 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 207 S
363. u need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both keywords to the same effect E N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 134 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional Keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values umet VOUS eege deen DEENEN 135 BODAN oinin AER NEES 136 Character Data arods a a a aaa aa a aaa aa a aaa en 136 Character STINGS EE 137 e Block 8 EE 137 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any
364. ual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be
365. ual 1173 9263 02 05 203 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements EMG EM CIC R J T Y J n m I Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowT ype gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 for a list of available window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 200 command the LAY
366. uations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz 30 kHz Example READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum measure ments see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or Exter nal and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 4 4 Triggering Measurements on page 173 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Tr
367. ue CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate CONFigure SPECtrum SELect Mode eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 263 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements mA U AI Y J A P Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate CONFigure TRGS IMMediate CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate These commands select a specific result display They are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chap ter 11 5 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 201 Usage Setting only CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt CONStell State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt DEModulation State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate State CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODulation State CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum SWITching State CONFigure MS MULTi STATe State CONFigure MS MULTi These commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout com mands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 5 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 201 CONFigure MS BSEarch State This command toggles between active burst search and inactive burst search Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE BURSt or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL inste
368. ues may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 133 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 136 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Common Suffixes 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum
369. ultiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For each parameter the following results are displayed Table 4 2 Calculated summary results Result Description SCPI query for result value type Current Value for currently measured frame only READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt CURRent Average Linear average value of Current results from the speci READ BURSt MACCuracy fied number of frames lt Parameter gt AVERage Exception The average of the Origin Offset Suppres sion is the linear average of the power ratio converted to dBm subsequently Peak Maximum value of Current results from specified num READ BURSt MACCuracy ber of frames lt Parameter gt MAXimum Exception The peak of the Origin Offset Suppression is the minimum value as this represents the worst case which needs to be detected Std Dev Standard deviation of Current results for specified num READ BURSt MACCuracy ber of frames lt Parameter gt SDEViation Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL on page 229 chapter 11 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Results on page 227 Modulation Spectrum Graph The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part exc
370. ults of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new mea surement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix Slot lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S s S First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values Result numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 242 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep annd then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 24 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage This command starts the measurement to read out the average power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs
371. uoce iore dete rir rae EE een mro ceri 253 GALGulate n MARKe r SIm X esee cu sata ra caen onda cien aee REENEN d dd omar ag aaa ed dd Maa nu Ai 254 GALE Gulate msMARKerSmsI sui s eeiecsexudaacn tenenda accen update aadd FA ad aaa eu Ra iniii 254 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 112 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI T
372. uracy IQlMbalance CURbent nennen 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvlIOlMbalance MA ximum nnne ener 233 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance SDEViation secs 233 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage essere 233 FETOChBURGOC MAC CuracvllOOFiset CURbent 233 FETCHIBURSH MACCuracy IOOFISet MAXIRTT 222 n ETA 233 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation eceseeeseeenerereneeeeeeeeeannaaeenenens 233 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFtset AVEhRage enne nennen 233 READ BURStPMAC Curacy I OOF Eeer 233 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum eese cei ceiecee senes aiaiai 233 READ BURStEMACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation nnn 233 FETOChBURGOC MAC CuracvlMERRor PEAK AVERage nennen 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent cessisse nnne 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MANlmum eene nennen 234 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERRor DEA GDtEViaton en eeeeoeorrre nen erererorereeenn 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK AVEHRage 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkKCUbent A 234 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAK MAXimum nennen 234 READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation 0c cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeaeeeeneees 234 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage essere nennen 234 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURReMnt 2 cceceeecestecceenererereneeeeeenneees 234 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlMERRorRMS MANimum eene 234 FETCh BURS
373. uration Burst TSC is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for continuous but framed signals or bursted signals Burst Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame con figuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 98 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration mmm G ee Demodulation None Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be analyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 189 Measure only on Sync If activated default only results from frames slots where the Slot to Measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behavior
374. ure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g phase error modulation spectrum CONF CHAN MSL MEAS 1 Configure slot 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 2 CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 0 EE PvT Measurement settings Check PvT filter CONF BURS PTEM FILT G1000 Align the limit line to mid of TSC TS for each slot CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI In PvT limits are checked against the max in min traces Programming Examples Query the max power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe2 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 0 Query the min power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe3 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for min trace CALCulate2 LIMit2 FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 0 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOTO LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 1 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURR gt 0 21559642255306244 Query the maximum phase err
375. urement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the GSM Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurement Results Details on supported measurements and their result types e Basics on GSM Measurements Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the measure ment e Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data e How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform GSM measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in t
376. us QUESTionable DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIO CONDition on page 258 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 259 Bit No Meaning 0 Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bitis set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 2 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 5 not used User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 257 R amp S9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements aua a IC R J E X I nan quam Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 6 Digital UO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the input transfer rate is too high 7 not used 8 Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output 9 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set w
377. ut ADD WINDow on page 201 for a list of available window types Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window SE NEE 207 ISCRITTO 209 EE lio M 213 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 62 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe 2 2 cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeaeaaaeaaeaaenaneneteenes 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE ccececce eee sr eee eeeeee ce teeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaaeaeaaaeneneeeees 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 on page 110 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command controls whether a trace is displayed or not and in which mode Each trace can only display a certain mode or nothing at all Blank table 11 4 below indi cates which measurements can display which traces and which trace modes _ _ _____L_L_L___ M User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 207 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Me
378. vel Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Programming Examples Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM n a a erg Slot 0 configuration Setup slot 0 for VAMOS AQPSK modulation Activate slot CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER Subchannel 1 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 1 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO0 SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 2 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER Subchannel 2 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Subchannel 2 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 7 Slot 1 configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLO
379. vel unit The data format depends on FORMat DATA on page 220 For Constellation diagrams the result is a vector of UO values for the measured points in the diagram The result is returned as a list of I Q value pairs Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace name to be read out TRACe1 Average trace transient spectrum Maximum trace TRACe2 Maximum trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRAC1 DATA TRACel Usage Query only Manual operation See EVM on page 16 See Magnitude Capture on page 16 See Magnitude Error on page 17 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 See Phase Error on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 25 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command reads the x values time in seconds of the Power vs Time measurement if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If a trace number is defined as a parameter for this command the x values time in sec onds of the Trigger to Sync measurement if active out of the window specified by the suffix n are returned For details see chapter 11 6 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results on page 225 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 221 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform G
380. wWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result r3 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Example LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MACC Adds a Modulation Accuracy display to the right of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Constellation on page 15 See EVM on page 16 See Magnitude Capture on page 16 See Magnitude Error on page 17 See Marker Table on page 18 See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 See Phase Error on page 23 See Power vs Slot on page 24 See PvT Full Burst on page 25 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 See Transient Spectrum Table on page 28 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 29 See Trigger to Sync Table on page 30 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for GSM application Parameter value Window type CONStell Constellation ETIMe EVM vs Time MCAPture Magnitude Capture MERRor Magnitude Error vs Time MTABle Marker Table MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy MSFDomain Modulation Spectrum Graph Frequency domain MSTable Modulation Spectrum Table PERRor Phase Error vs Time User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 202
381. wer Avg SLOT Slot CURRent CRESt on page 244 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot ALL CRESt on page 241 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 201 Results chapter 11 6 6 Power vs Slot Results on page 240 PvT Full Burst The Power vs Time evaluation determines the power of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope and performs a limit check against the specified PvT mask The PvT Full Burst result display shows the trace of the power values for all bursts in the slot scope versus time The PvT mask is indicated by red lines and the overall result of the limit check is shown at the top of the diagram Note The result of the Power vs Time limit check for individual slots is indicated in the Power vs Slot on page 24 evaluation EEUU RE I User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 25 R amp SS9FSW K10 Measurement Results 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min e4 Clrw 127 385 us 1 254 ms Note Full burst refers to the fact that the entire burst is displayed including the rising and falling edges and the burst top However you can easily analyze the edges in more detail using the zoom functions see chapter 7 3 Zoom Functions on page 116 The following default settings are used for a Power vs Time evaluation Table 4 7 Default settings for a Power vs Time evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to measure
382. wer vs Time Modulation Accuracy and Modulation and Tran sient Spectrum as required in the standard This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application provides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the GSM Application GSM measurements are performed in a separate application on the R amp S FSW To activate the GSM application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the GSM item FE GSM The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the GSM application User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 10 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application REESEN Understanding the Display Information The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the GSM Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview Softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 Configuration Overview on page 61 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an applicat
383. window first and then configure the settings e Define the Traces to be displayed in the window Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of measure ments If necessary increase the Statistics Count in the Sweep Config dialog box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defining the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multip
384. y Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 170 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is speci fied in the data sheet If the defi
385. y RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation See Digital 1 Q Input State on page 73 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 75 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere INST SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 157 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 175 RETE E I UTE e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLJ User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 157 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SG amp DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output WIP tN DEVIC C 158 INPur eler Nee UPPE e OT 159 INPut DIQ SANGSEGODPling
386. y Offset on page 81 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 82 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 170 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 EEUU RA N User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 170 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 11 4 3 3 Configuring and Performing GSM Measurements Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 82 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 Configuring the Attenuation l i ee REI EE 171 d eg WE e Do m
387. y in the frequency list Return values lt Placeholder gt curently irrelevant Freq1 Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM Abs Rel Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM Status Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 22 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 eee User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 238 R amp SS9FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements aM a o n H na Retrieving Results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the internal reference power of the Modulation Spectrum This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table eval
388. y only See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 20 See PvT Full Burst on page 25 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 27 For a detailed example see chapter 11 10 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 269 Table 11 6 Meaning of return values depending on result display Result display SCPI Return values Power vs Time Graph CALCulate n LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the max hold trace failed 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the lower limit line against the min hold trace failed 0 passed Mod Spectrum Graph CALCulate lt n gt LIMit FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the aver age trace failed 0 passed Tra Spectrum Graph CALCulate lt n gt LIMit FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the max hold trace failed 0 passed 11 6 10 Retrieving Marker Results Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 253 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 252 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements El Retrieving Results Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results GALGulate n DEETamarketrsmb X cocinan scum NEESS EE a noe a Ed in M aa ga qnd adn ai 253 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative 253 GALE DUulatespnsDEETamarkersms2Y 9
389. ync ssesssesseeeeene 99 Multicarrier filter Threshold rc tert tret rt T Tail bits Reference signal erret 100 TOMA S 32 33 279 Time aca e eR Reference PvT E ue EE Lirnitlies E Timeslot alignment miming AAVANCE ottenere cen Lirnitilines is rere tt tror e eret entera sna Traces lere nisi pee 109 BICI 61 jj ro 110 User Manual 1173 9263 02 05 Mode remote A 207 Number of result values sseeeseese 224 Presetting Selecting le Statistical evaluation MSRA mode 57 Training Sequence See MP 68 Transient Spectrum Graph evaluation method seesseeseessrsererrrnene Graph results remote sssseessssss Limit check e Reference POWER cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeetees SONGS rone e etn as Table evaluation method T Table results remote sssssessssssss Trigger Auto Set roe eerte dre 108 Conditions remote sese 173 Configuration Softkey sss 85 Drop out time External isisisi airada aa External remote AA 177 Free Run POWE RR 39 98 Remote control P SONGS EE EIL Trigger level External trigger remote sess 175 UO Power r

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW GSM Application User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW GSM Application User Manual